Определяем
Сегодня покупают
ГлавнаяСправочникиLenovoSR655 V3
Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3 Server: технические характеристики и документация
← Вернуться назад
Сервер Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 7Z01A049EA
Сервер Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 7Z01A049EA
1 488 486 ₸
Смотреть в магазине

Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3 Server: технические характеристики и документация

Abstract

The Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3 is a 1-socket 2U server that features the 5th Gen AMD EPYC 9005 "Turin" family of processors . With up to 160 cores per processor and support for the new PCIe 5.0 standard for I/O, the SR655 V3 offers the ultimate in one-socket server performance in a 2U form factor.

This product guide provides essential pre-sales information to understand the ThinkSystem SR655 V3 server, its key features and specifications, components and options, and configuration guidelines. This guide is intended for technical specialists, sales specialists, sales engineers, IT architects, and other IT professionals who want to learn more about the SR655 V3 and consider its use in IT solutions.

Change History

Changes in the August 27, 2026 update:

  • Add information on memory DIMM fillers needed for field upgrades such as adding a GPU - Memory DIMM filler section

Introduction

The Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3 is a 1-socket 2U server that features the 5th Gen AMD EPYC 9005 "Turin" family of processors. With up to 160 cores per processor and support for the new PCIe 5.0 standard for I/O, the SR655 V3 offers the ultimate in one-socket server performance in a 2U form factor. The server is ideal for dense workloads that can take advantage of GPU processing and high-performance NVMe drives.

Suggested uses: AI Inference, VDI, OLTP, Analytics, software-defined storage

Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3
Figure 1. Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3

360° View Full 3D Tour

Did you know?

The SR655 V3 server is a very configuration-rich offering, supporting 31 different drive bay configurations in the front, middle and rear of the server and 6 different slot configurations at the rear of the server. This level of flexibility ensures that you can configure the server exactly the way your workload requires.

Key features

Combining performance and flexibility, the SR655 V3 server is a great choice for enterprises of all sizes. The server offers a broad selection of drive and slot configurations and offers high performance features that industries such as finance, healthcare and telco need. Outstanding reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) and high-efficiency design can improve your business environment and can help save operational costs.

Scalability and performance

The following features boost performance, improve scalability and reduce costs:

  • Supports one 5th Gen AMD EPYC 9005 processor
    • Up to 160 cores and 320 threads
    • Core speed of up to 4.0 GHz
    • TDP rating of up to 400 W
  • Supports one fourth-generation AMD EPYC 9004 processor
    • Up to 128 cores and 256 threads
    • Core speed of up to 4.1 GHz
    • TDP rating of up to 360 W
  • Support for DDR5 memory DIMMs to maximize the performance of the memory subsystem:
    • 12 DDR5 memory DIMMs
    • 12 memory channels (1 DIMM per channel)
    • DIMM speeds up to 6400 MHz
    • Using 256GB 3DS RDIMMs, the server supports up to 3TB of system memory
  • Supports up to eight single-width GPUs or three double-wide GPUs, for substantial processing power in a 2U system.
  • The server is Compute Express Link (CXL) v1.1 Ready. With CXL 1.1 for next-generation workloads, you can reduce compute latency in the data center and lower TCO. CXL is a protocol that runs across the standard PCIe physical layer and can support both standard PCIe devices as well as CXL devices on the same link.
  • Supports up to 40x 2.5-inch hot-swap drive bays, by using combinations of front-accessible (up to 24 bays), mid bays (8 bays) and rear-accessible (8 bays).
  • Supports 20x 3.5-inch drive bays for lower-cost high-capacity HDD storage. 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive bays can be mixed if desired.
  • Supports up to 24x NVMe drives without oversubscription of PCIe lanes (1:1 connectivity), or up to 32 NVMe drives with oversubscription. The use of NVMe drives maximizes drive I/O performance, in terms of throughput, bandwidth, and latency.
  • Supports up to 20x SATA drives using the onboard SATA controller (no additional adapter needed), enabling lower cost, high capacity storage solution for cold storage workloads.
  • Supports high-speed RAID controllers from Lenovo and Broadcom providing 12 Gb SAS connectivity to the drive backplanes. A variety of PCIe 3.0 and PCIe 4.0 RAID adapters are available.
  • Supports two externally accessible 7mm hot-swap drives for operating system boot functions or data storage. Optional RAID-0 or RAID-1.
  • Supports M.2 drives for convenient operating system boot functions. Available M.2 adapters support either one M.2 drive or two M.2 drives. Optional RAID-0 or RAID-1.
  • Up to 10x total PCIe slots (either 10x rear, or 6x rear + 2x front), plus a slot dedicated to the OCP adapter (rear or front). 2.5-inch drive configurations also support an additional internal bay for a cabled RAID adapter or HBA.
  • The server has a dedicated industry-standard OCP 3.0 small form factor (SFF) slot, with a PCIe 4.0 x16 interface, supporting a variety of Ethernet network adapters. Simple-swap mechanism with thumbscrews and pull-tab enables tool-less installation and removal of the adapter. Supports shared BMC network sideband connectivity to enable out-of-band systems management.
  • The server offers PCI Express 5.0 (PCIe Gen 5) I/O expansion capabilities that doubles the theoretical maximum bandwidth of PCIe 4.0 (32GT/s in each direction for PCIe 5.0, compared to 16 GT/s with PCIe 4.0). A PCIe 5.0 x16 slot provides 128 GB/s bandwidth, enough to support a 400GbE network connection.

Availability and serviceability

The server provides many features to simplify serviceability and increase system uptime:

  • Designed to run 24 hours a day, 7 days a week
  • The server uses ECC memory and supports memory RAS features including Single Device Data Correction (SDDC, also known as Chipkill), Patrol/Demand Scrubbing, Bounded Fault, DRAM Address Command Parity with Replay, DRAM Uncorrected ECC Error Retry, On-die ECC, ECC Error Check and Scrub (ECS), and Post Package Repair.
  • The server offers hot-swap drives, supporting RAID redundancy for data protection and greater system uptime.
  • Available M.2 configuration with RAID support which can enable two SATA or two NVMe M.2 drives to be configured as a redundant pair.
  • The server has up to two hot-swap redundant power supplies and up to six hot-swap redundant fans to provide availability for business-critical applications.
  • Optional front-accessible slots and drives so that most major components and cables (except power) are located at the front of the server
  • The power-source-independent light path diagnostics uses LEDs to lead the technician to failed (or failing) components, which simplifies servicing, speeds up problem resolution, and helps improve system availability.
  • Solid-state drives (SSDs) offer more reliability than traditional mechanical HDDs for greater uptime.
  • Proactive Platform Alerts (including PFA and SMART alerts): Processors, voltage regulators, memory, internal storage (SAS/SATA HDDs and SSDs, NVMe SSDs, M.2 storage), fans, power supplies, RAID controllers, server ambient and subcomponent temperatures. Alerts can be surfaced through the XClarity Controller to managers such as Lenovo XClarity One, VMware vCenter, and Microsoft System Center. These proactive alerts let you take appropriate actions in advance of possible failure, thereby increasing server uptime and application availability.
  • The built-in XClarity Controller 2 continuously monitors system parameters, triggers alerts, and performs recovery actions in case of failures to minimize downtime.
  • Built-in diagnostics in UEFI, using Lenovo XClarity Provisioning Manager, speed up troubleshooting tasks to reduce service time.
  • Lenovo XClarity Provisioning Manager supports diagnostics and can save service data to a USB key drive or remote CIFS share folder for troubleshooting and reduce service time.
  • Auto restart in the event of a momentary loss of AC power (based on power policy setting in the XClarity Controller service processor)
  • Offers a diagnostics port on the front of the server to allow you to attach an external diagnostics handset for enhanced systems management capabilities.
  • Support for the XClarity Mobile app running on a supported smartphone and connected to the server through the service-enabled USB port, enables additional local systems management functions.
  • Three-year or one-year customer-replaceable unit and onsite limited warranty, 9 x 5 next business day. Optional service upgrades are available.

Manageability and security

Systems management features simplify local and remote management:

  • The server includes an XClarity Controller 2 (XCC2) to monitor server availability. Optional upgrade to XCC Platinum to provide remote control (keyboard video mouse) functions, support for the mounting of remote media files, FIPS 140-3 security, enhanced NIST 800-193 support, boot capture, and other management and security features.
  • Lenovo XClarity One offers comprehensive hardware management tools that help to increase uptime, reduce costs and improve productivity through advanced server management capabilities.
  • UEFI-based Lenovo XClarity Provisioning Manager, accessible from F1 during boot, provides system inventory information, graphical UEFI Setup, platform update function, RAID Setup wizard, operating system installation function, and diagnostic functions.
  • Support for Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager which captures real-time power and temperature data from the server and provides automated controls to lower energy costs.
  • An integrated industry-standard Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) enables improved setup, configuration, and updates, and simplifies error handling.
  • Support for industry standard management protocols, IPMI 2.0, SNMP 3.0, Redfish REST API, serial console via IPMI
  • An integrated hardware Trusted Platform Module (TPM) supporting TPM 2.0 enables advanced cryptographic functionality, such as digital signatures and remote attestation.
  • Administrator and power-on passwords help protect from unauthorized access to the server.
  • Supports AMD Secure Root-of-Trust, Secure Run and Secure Move features to minimize potential attacks and protect data as the OS is booted, as applications are run and as applications are migrated from server to server.
  • Supports Secure Boot to ensure only a digitally signed operating system can be used.
  • Industry-standard Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) NI support for faster, stronger encryption.
  • Additional physical security features are a chassis intrusion switch and a lockable front bezel.

Energy efficiency

The following energy-efficiency features help save energy, reduce operational costs, and increase energy availability:

  • Energy-efficient planar components help lower operational costs.
  • High-efficiency power supplies with 80 PLUS Titanium certifications
  • Low-voltage 1.1V DDR5 memory offers energy savings compared to 1.2V DDR4 DIMMs, an approximately 20% decrease in power consumption
  • Solid-state drives (SSDs) consume as much as 80% less power than traditional spinning 2.5-inch HDDs.
  • The server uses hexagonal ventilation holes, which can be grouped more densely than round holes, providing more efficient airflow through the system and thus keeping your system cooler.
  • Optional Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager provides advanced data center power notification and analysis to help achieve lower heat output and reduced cooling needs.

Performance benchmarks

At Lenovo, we know customers care most about how their workloads perform in real-world environments, which is why we carefully tune our server hardware, firmware, and drivers to help deliver strong benchmark results that reflect practical business needs. The goal is simple: to help customers run their critical applications more efficiently and achieve better outcomes.

The following table lists the current world record performance benchmarks that Lenovo performance engineers have achieved on the SR655 V3. This reinforces that the server is an excellent choice for a server to run wide range of application workloads.

The SR655 V3 has a total of 46 current performance benchmark world records.

Results referenced are current as of September 1, 2026.

Table 1. Current world record performance benchmark results for SR655 V3
Benchmark Sub-benchmark Benchmark metric Current
world
records		 Lenovo result Link
SAP SfS - SAP SfS benchmark users 1 Best result (tied) SAP SfS link
TPC-E v1 - tpsE and USD per tpsE 4 Best 1P & Overall performance and Best 1P & Overall price/performance TPC-E link
TPCx-AI v2 - AIUCpm and USD per AIUCpm 4 Best 1P & Overall performance @ SF3 and Best 1P & Overall price/performance @ SF3 TPCx-AI link
VMmark v4 - VMmark 4.0.3 Score 1 Best VMmark4 result for 1-Socket servers in a Matched Pair configuration VMmark link
SPEC CPU 2017 SPEC CPU 2017 Integer Rate SPECrate 2017_int_energy_base 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2017 SPEC CPU 2017 Integer Rate SPECrate 2017_int_energy_peak 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2017 SPEC CPU 2017 Floating Point Rate SPECrate 2017_fp_energy_base 1 Best 1P score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2017 SPEC CPU 2017 Floating Point Rate SPECrate 2017_fp_energy_peak 1 Best 1P score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2017 SPEC CPU 2017 Floating Point Speed SPECspeed 2017_fp_energy_base 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2017 SPEC CPU 2017 Floating Point Speed SPECspeed 2017_fp_energy_peak 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Integer Speed SPECspeed 2026_int_energy_base 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Integer Speed SPECspeed 2026_int_energy_peak 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Floating Point Speed SPECspeed 2026_fp_energy_base 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Floating Point Speed SPECspeed 2026_fp_energy_peak 2 Best 1P score and Best Overall score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Integer Rate SPECrate 2026_int_energy_base 1 Best 1P score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Integer Rate SPECrate 2026_int_energy_peak 1 Best 1P score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Floating Point Rate SPECrate 2026_fp_energy_base 1 Best 1P score SPEC CPU link
SPEC CPU 2026 SPEC CPU 2026 Floating Point Rate SPECrate 2026_fp_energy_peak 1 Best 1P score SPEC CPU link
SPECpower 2008 SPECpower_ssj2008 overall ssj_ops/watt 1 Best 1P Windows score SPECpower link
SPECpower 2008 SPECpower_ssj2008 overall ssj_ops/watt 1 Best 1P Linux score SPECpower link
SPEC MPI 2007 Medium SPECmpiM_base2007, SPECmpiM_peak2007 2 Best 1-Node 1P Base & Peak MPI SPEC MPI link
SPECjbb 2015 Distributed max-jOPS SPECjbb2015-Distributed max-jOPS 1 Best 1P Windows score SPECjbb link
SPECjbb 2015 Distributed critical-jOPS SPECjbb2015-Distributed critical-jOPS 1 Best 1P Windows score SPECjbb link
SPEChpc 2021 Tiny Suite SPEChpc 2021_tny_base, SPEChpc 2021_tny_peak 2 Best 1-node 1P 1GPU base and peak ACC scores SPEChpc link
SPEChpc 2021 Tiny Suite SPEChpc 2021_tny_base, SPEChpc 2021_tny_peak 2 Best 1-node 1P 2GPU base and peak ACC scores SPEChpc link
SPEChpc 2021 Small Suite SPEChpc 2021_sml_peak 1 Best 1-node 1P Peak MPI score SPEChpc link
SPEChpc 2021 Small Suite SPEChpc 2021_sml_peak 1 Best 1-node 1P Peak OMP score SPEChpc link
SPEChpc 2021 Small Suite SPEChpc 2021_sml_base, SPEChpc 2021_sml_peak 2 Best 2-node 1P Base & Peak OMP scores SPEChpc link

See the complete list of current world records in the Lenovo Press article Performance Benchmark World Record Summary for Lenovo ThinkSystem Servers.

The Lenovo Server Performance Team also publishes reports on key performance world records at the time the world record is announced. See all published Performance Benchmark Reports.

Comparing the SR655 V3 to the SR655

The ThinkSystem SR655 V3 improves on the previous generation SR655, as summarized in the following table.

Table 2. Comparing the SR655 V3 to the SR655
Feature SR655 SR655 V3 Benefits
Processor
  • 1x 2nd or 3rd Gen AMD EPYC processor
  • Up to 64 cores
  • TDP ratings up to 280W
  • 64x PCIe 4.0 lanes per processor
  • 1x 4th or 5th Gen AMD EPYC processor
  • Up to 160 cores
  • TDP ratings up to 400W
  • 64x PCIe 5.0 lanes per processor
  • Significant increase in cores per processor
  • Increased performance
  • Consolidation of more apps on same number of servers, reducing costs
  • New PCIe 5.0 support means higher performance networking and NVMe storage
Memory
  • DDR4 memory operating up to 2933 MHz
  • 8 channels per CPU
  • 16 DIMMs, 2 DIMMs per channel
  • Supports RDIMMs and 3DS RDIMMs
  • Up to 2TB of system memory (16x 128GB)
  • DDR5 memory operating up to 6400 MHz
  • 12 channels per CPU
  • 12 DIMMs, 1 DIMM per channel
  • Supports RDIMMs, 3DS RDIMMs and 9x4 RDIMMs
  • Up to 3TB of system memory (12x 256GB)
  • New DDR5 memory offers significant performance improvements over DDR4
  • More memory channels means greater memory bandwidth
  • Support for lower-cost 9x4 DIMMs
Internal storage
  • 20x 3.5” SAS/SATA/NVMe (12 front, 4 mid, 4 rear)
  • Up to 32x 2.5” SAS/SATA/NVMe (24 front + 8 mid, or 24 front + 4 rear)
  • Up to 4x 3.5” or 8x 2.5” mid-chassis drive bays
  • Up to 4x 3.5” or 4x 2.5” rear drive bays
  • 2x Internal M.2 with optional RAID
  • 16x onboard NVMe ports
  • 20x 3.5” SAS/SATA/NVMe (12 front, 4 mid, 4 rear)
  • 40x 2.5” SAS/SATA/NVMe (24 front, 8 mid, 8 rear)
  • Up to 4x 3.5” or 8x 2.5” mid-chassis drive bays
  • Up to 4x 3.5” or 8x 2.5” rear drive bays
  • 2x Internal M.2 (optional RAID support)
  • 12x onboard NVMe ports
  • 2x rear 7mm hot swap SAS/SATA/NVMe (optional RAID support)
  • Flexible storage offerings
  • Up to 32x NVMe drives for high-performance storage
  • 7mm hot swap drives as boot drives
RAID
  • 8-port and 16-port RAID adapters with up to 8GB flash
  • Support for Lenovo and Broadcom adapters
  • Support for PCIe or Internal cabled (CFF) form factor adapters
  • Storage HBAs available
  • PCIe 3.0 and PCIe 4.0 adapter choices
  • 8-port and 16-port RAID adapters with up to 8GB flash
  • Support for Lenovo and Broadcom adapters
  • Support for PCIe or Internal cabled (CFF) form factor adapters
  • Support for NVMe drives connected to 940 RAID adapters (Tri-Mode)
  • Storage HBAs available
  • PCIe 3.0 and PCIe 4.0 adapter choices with support for Gen 5 adapters when available
  • Consistent RAID/HBA support
  • Flexible config solution
  • PCIe Gen 5 allows for greater storage performance
Networking
  • OCP 3.0 slot with PCIe Gen4 x16 interface (rear of server)
  • Additional PCIe adapters supported up to PCIe Gen4
  • 1GbE dedicated Management port
  • OCP 3.0 slot with PCIe Gen4 x16 interface (rear or front of server)
  • Additional PCIe adapters supported up to PCIe Gen5
  • 1GbE dedicated Management port
  • Improved performance with PCIe Gen 5
  • Optional front-accessible OCP slot
PCIe
  • Supports PCIe 4.0
  • Up to 8x PCIe slots (all full-height slots)
  • Supports a RAID/HBA in CFF form factor (does not occupy a PCIe slot)
  • 1x OCP 3.0 slot (rear)
  • Supports PCIe 5.0
  • Up to 10x PCIe slots (6x full height, 4x low-profile) or 8x PCIe slots (all full-height slots)
  • Up to 9x slots can be PCIe 5.0
  • Supports a RAID/HBA in CFF form factor (does not occupy a PCIe slot)
  • 1x OCP 3.0 slot, either rear or front
  • Support for 3x front-accessible slots (2x FH PCIe + 1x OCP) with 16 drive bays
  • PCIe Gen 5 allows for greater I/O performance
  • Flexible PCIe offerings
  • Front-accessible slots available
  • More PCIe connections for greater PCIe/NVMe support
Management and security
  • Limited XClarity support with ASPEED 2500 BMC
  • Tamper Switch security solution (intrusion switch)
  • Integrated XClarity Controller 2
  • Support for full XClarity toolset
  • Platform Firmware Resiliency (PFR) hardware Root of Trust (RoT)
  • Tamper Switch security solution (intrusion switch)
  • New XCC2 offers improved management capabilities
  • Support for full XClarity toolset
  • Silicon-level security solution
Power
  • 500W, 750W, 1100W AC Platinum/Titanium Hot Plug PSU
  • 1100W -48VDC Platinum general support
  • 240V HVDC support for PRC customers
  • Active-Standby mode
  • 750W, 1100W, 1800W AC Platinum/Titanium Hot Plug PSU
  • 1100W -48VDC Platinum general support
  • 240V HVDC support for PRC customers
  • Active-Standby mode
  • Multiple PSU offerings to suit the configuration selected
  • New ErP Lot 9-compliant offerings
  • Support for Telco customers with -48V requirements

Components and connectors

The following figure shows the front of the server.

Front view of the Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3
Figure 2. Front view of the Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3

The following figure shows the components visible from the rear of the server. The figure shows one configuration, with eight PCIe slots, however there are additional rear configurations which include 3.5-inch drive bays, 2.5-inch drive bays, or 7mm drive bays.

Rear view of the Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3
Figure 3. Rear view of the Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3 (configuration with eight PCIe slots)

The following figure shows the locations of key components inside the server.

Internal view of the Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3
Figure 4. Internal view of the Lenovo ThinkSystem SR655 V3

System architecture

The following figure shows the architectural block diagram of the SR655 V3, showing the major components and their connections.

SR655 V3 system architectural block diagram
Figure 5. SR655 V3 system architectural block diagram

Standard specifications

The following table lists the standard specifications.

Table 3. Standard specifications
Components Specification
Machine types 7D9F - 1 year warranty
7D9E - 3 year warranty
Form factor 2U rack.
Processor One AMD EPYC processor, either 5th Gen 9005 ("Turin") or 4th Gen 9004 ("Genoa"). Supported processors up to 160 cores, core speeds of up to 4.1 GHz, and TDP ratings of up to 400W. Supports PCIe 5.0 for high performance I/O.
Chipset Not applicable (platform controller hub functions are integrated into the processor)
Memory 12 DIMM slots. The processor has 12 memory channels, with 1 DIMM per channel (DPC). Lenovo TruDDR5 RDIMMs, 3DS RDIMMs, and 9x4 RDIMMs are supported, up to 6400 MHz
Memory maximum Up to 3TB with 12x 256GB 3DS RDIMMs
Persistent memory Not supported.
Memory protection ECC, SDDC, Patrol/Demand Scrubbing, Bounded Fault, DRAM Address Command Parity with Replay, DRAM Uncorrected ECC Error Retry, On-die ECC, ECC Error Check and Scrub (ECS), Post Package Repair
Disk drive bays

Up to 20x 3.5-inch or 40x 2.5-inch hot-swap drive bays:

  • Front bays can be 3.5-inch (8 or 12 bays) or 2.5-inch (8, 16 or 24 bays)
  • Middle bays can be 3.5-inch (4 bays) or 2.5-inch (8 bays)
  • Rear bays can be 3.5-inch (2 or 4 bays) or 2.5-inch (4 or 8 bays)
  • Combinations of SAS/SATA, NVMe, or AnyBay (supporting SAS, SATA or NVMe) are available

The server also supports these drives for OS boot or drive storage:

  • Two 7mm drives at the rear of the server
  • Internal M.2 module supporting up to two M.2 drives

See Storage configurations for details.
Maximum internal storage
  • 2.5-inch drives:
    • 1228.8TB using 40x 30.72TB 2.5-inch SAS SSDs
    • 307.2TB using 40x 7.68TB 2.5-inch SATA SSDs
    • 3,932.16TB using 32x 122.88TB 2.5-inch NVMe SSDs
    • 96TB using 40x 2.4TB 2.5-inch SAS HDDs
  • 3.5-inch drives:
    • 480TB using 20x 24TB 3.5-inch SAS HDDs
    • 480TB using 20x 24TB 3.5-inch SATA HDDs
    • 307.2TB using 20x 15.36TB 3.5-inch SAS SSDs
    • 153.6TB using 20x 7.68TB 3.5-inch SATA SSDs
    • 153.6TB using 12x 12.8TB 3.5-inch NVMe SSDs
Storage controller
  • Up to 16x Onboard SATA ports (non-RAID)
  • Up to 12x Onboard NVMe ports (non-RAID)
  • NVMe Retimer Adapter (PCIe 4.0 or PCIe 5.0)
  • NVMe Switch Adapter (PCIe 4.0)
  • 12 Gb SAS/SATA RAID adapters
    • 8, 16 or 32 ports
    • Up to 8GB flash-backed cache
    • PCIe 4.0 or PCIe 3.0 host interface
  • 12 Gb SAS/SATA HBA (non-RAID)
    • 8-port and 16-port
    • PCIe 4.0 or PCIe 3.0 host interface
Optical drive bays No internal optical drive
Tape drive bays No internal backup drive
Network interfaces Dedicated OCP 3.0 SFF slot with PCIe 4.0 x16 host interface, either at the rear of the server (rear-accessible) or the front of the server (front-accessible). Supports a variety of 2-port and 4-port adapters with 1GbE, 10GbE and 25GbE network connectivity. One port can optionally be shared with the XClarity Controller 2 (XCC2) management processor for Wake-on-LAN and NC-SI support. Additional PCIe network adapters supported in PCIe slots.
PCI Expansion slots

Up to 10x total PCIe slots (either 10x rear, or 6x rear + 2x front), plus a slot dedicated to the OCP adapter (rear or front). 2.5-inch drive configurations also support an additional internal bay for a cabled RAID adapter or HBA.

Rear: Up to 10x PCIe slots, plus a slot dedicated to the OCP adapter. Slots are either PCIe 5.0 or 4.0 depending on riser selection and rear drive bay selection. OCP slot is PCIe 4.0.

Slots are configured using three riser cards. Riser 1 (slots 1-3) and Riser 2 (slots 4-6) are installed in slots in the system board, Riser 3 (slots 7-8) and Riser 4 (9-10) are cabled to ports on the system board. A variety of riser cards are available. See the I/O expansion for details.

Front: The server supports slots at the front of the server (configurations with up to 16 drive bays), as an alternative to rear slots in Riser 3 (and Riser 4). Front slots are 2x PCIe x16 full-height half-length slots plus 1x OCP slot. OCP slot is PCIe 4.0.

Internal: For 2.5-inch front drive configurations, the server supports the installation of a RAID adapter or HBA in a dedicated area that does not consume any of the PCIe slots.
Ports

Front: 1x USB 3.2 G1 (5 Gb/s) port, 1x USB 2.0 port (also for XCC local management), External diagnostics port, optional VGA port.

Rear: 3x USB 3.2 G1 (5 Gb/s) ports, 1x VGA video port, 1x RJ-45 1GbE systems management port for XCC remote management. Optional 2nd XCC remote management port (installs in OCP slot). Optional DB-9 COM serial port (installs in slot 3).

Internal: 1x USB 3.2 G1 (5 Gb/s) connector for operating system or license key purposes.
Cooling Up to 6x N+1 redundant hot swap 60 mm fans, configuration dependent. One fan integrated in each power supply. For customers with water infrastructure in their data center, the SR655 V3 also offers Lenovo Neptune Core open-loop water cooling for efficient heat removal.
Power supply Up to two hot-swap redundant AC power supplies, 80 PLUS Platinum or 80 PLUS Titanium certification. 750 W, 1100 W, 1800 W, 2400 W, and 2600 W AC, supporting 220 V AC. 750 W and 1100 W options also support 110V input supply. In China only, all power supply options support 240 V DC. Also available is a 1100W power supply with a -48V DC input.
Video Embedded video graphics with 16 MB memory with 2D hardware accelerator, integrated into the XClarity Controller. Maximum resolution is 1920x1200 32bpp at 60Hz.
Hot-swap parts Drives, power supplies, and fans.
Systems management Operator panel with status LEDs. Optional External Diagnostics Handset with LCD display. Models with 16x 2.5-inch front drive bays can optionally support an Integrated Diagnostics Panel. XClarity Controller 2 (XCC2) embedded management based on the ASPEED AST2600 baseboard management controller (BMC). Dedicated rear Ethernet port for XCC2 remote access for management. Optional 2nd redundant XCC2 remote port supported, installs in the OCP slot. XClarity One for centralized infrastructure management, XClarity Integrator plugins, and XClarity Energy Manager centralized server power management. Optional XCC Platinum to enable remote control functions and other features.
Security features Chassis intrusion switch, Power-on password, administrator's password, Root of Trust module supporting TPM 2.0 and Platform Firmware Resiliency (PFR). In China only, optional Nationz TPM 2.0. Optional lockable front security bezel.
Operating systems supported Microsoft Windows Server, Microsoft Windows 10 & 11, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, SUSE Linux Enterprise Server, VMware ESXi, Ubuntu Server. See the Operating system support section for specifics.
Limited warranty Three-year or one-year (model dependent) customer-replaceable unit and onsite limited warranty with 9x5 next business day (NBD).
Service and support Optional service upgrades are available through Lenovo Services: 4-hour or 2-hour response time, 6-hour fix time, 1-year or 2-year warranty extension, software support for Lenovo hardware and some third-party applications.
Dimensions Width: 445 mm (17.5 in.), height: 87 mm (3.4 in.), depth: 766 mm (30.1 in.). See Physical and electrical specifications for details.
Weight Maximum: 38.8 kg (85.5 lb)

Lenovo Top Choice

Lenovo offers two “quick-ship” programs to make it easy for our customers to get quick delivery of our offerings:

  • Lenovo Top Choice Express: A Configure-to-Order (CTO) model that uses a "best of" subset of components. It allows for customization while maintaining significantly faster lead times than standard CTO.

    Top Choice Express (TCE) is the way to get custom configurations as quickly as possible. It allows DCSC configurator users to configure systems in CTO Mode, selecting the required hardware components while still benefiting from faster turnaround than traditional CTO. These configurations are built and fully integrated by Lenovo Manufacturing, with simple configuration steps, instant pricing, and quicker delivery.

    To see which components are TCE, check the TCE column in the various component tables in this product guide. Green cells mean that the component is enabled for ordering with Top Choice Express in all regions world-wide. Orange cells with the symbol mean that the component is enabled for Top Choice Express in only some regions. Mouse over or tap on the cell to see which regions have it enabled for TCE.

    Note: Top Choice Express is for configure-to-order builds only, not for standalone option part numbers.

  • Lenovo Top Choice Stock: Pre-built, fixed-configuration units held in distribution. They are the "Ready-to-Ship" inventory options for customers who need a server quickly.

    Top Choice Stock (TCS) is used in Preconfigured Mode in DCSC, starting from a standard pre‑built configuration and adding option components as needed. Systems are assembled and fulfilled by Lenovo partners, enabling quick order processing and fast shipment through distribution. This path supports rapid delivery while maintaining flexibility through add‑on options. For details of TCS models, see the Preconfigured Models section.

Note: Ship dates are estimates only; actual ship times may vary based on platform and component availability, order processing, logistics, and external factors beyond Lenovo’s control. Lenovo is not liable for delays.

Models

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 models can be configured by using the Lenovo Data Center Solution Configurator (DCSC).

Topics in this section:

  • CTO models
  • CTO models for Windows 10 and Windows 11
  • Base feature codes
  • Preconfigured models
  • Models for Asia Pacific region
  • Models for Australia and New Zealand
  • Models for Brazil
  • Models for EMEA region
  • Models for Latin American countries (except Brazil)

CTO models

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 models can be configured by using the Lenovo Data Center Solution Configurator (DCSC).

Configure-to-order (CTO) models are used to create models with factory-integrated server customizations. For CTO models, two types of base CTO models are available for the SR655 V3 as listed in the columns in the following table:

  • General purpose base CTO models are for general business (non-HPC) and is selectable by choosing General Purpose mode in DCSC.
  • AI and HPC base models are intended for Artificial Intelligence (AI) and High Performance Computing (HPC) configurations and solutions are enabled using the AI & HPC Hardware - ThinkSystem Hardware mode in DCSC. These configurations, along with Lenovo EveryScale Solutions, can also be built using System x and Cluster Solutions Configurator (x-config). Tip: Some HPC and AI models are not listed in DCSC and can only be configured in x-config.

"For AI" models: The base CTO models listed in the table with "for AI" in the names are the only base models that support high-performance GPUs and accelerators (Controlled GPUs). These models are classified under US Government ECCN regulations and have limited market and customer availability. All other base models do not support high-performance GPUs.

Preconfigured server models may also be available for the SR655 V3, however these are region-specific; that is, each region may define their own server models, and not all server models are available in every region.

The following table lists the base CTO models of the ThinkSystem SR655 V3 server.

Table 4. Base CTO models
Machine Type/Model
General purpose		 Machine Type/Model
for AI and HPC		 Description
7D9ECTO1WW 7D9ECTOLWW ThinkSystem SR655 V3 - 3yr Warranty
7D9ECTO3WW 7D9ECTOHWW ThinkSystem SR655 V3 - 3yr Warranty for AI
7D9FCTO1WW 7D9FCTOLWW ThinkSystem SR655 V3 - 1yr Warranty

CTO models for Windows 10 and Windows 11

The SR655 V3 can run Windows 10 and Windows 11, however only a subset of adapters and drives can be installed. For ease of configuration, the following Base CTO models have been announced to assist building a configuration that can be used with the client operating systems. For more information, see the Windows 10 and Windows 11 section.

Table 5. Base CTO models for SR655 V3 with Windows 10 and Windows 11
Machine Type/Model
General purpose		 Description
7D9ECTO2WW ThinkSystem SR655 V3 Workstation - 3 year Warranty
7D9FCTO2WW ThinkSystem SR655 V3 Workstation - 1 year Warranty

Base feature codes

Models of the SR655 V3 are defined based on whether the server has 2.5-inch drive bays at the front (called the 2.5-inch chassis) or whether it has 3.5-inch drive bays at the front (called the 3.5-inch chassis). For models, the feature codes for these chassis bases are as listed in the following table.

Table 6. Chassis base feature codes
Feature code Description Top Choice Express
BLKJ ThinkSystem V3 2U 12x3.5" Chassis TCE
BLKK ThinkSystem V3 2U 24x2.5" Chassis TCE

Preconfigured models

The following tables list the available models, grouped by region.

  • Models for Asia Pacific region
  • Models for Australia and New Zealand
  • Models for Brazil
  • Models for EMEA region
  • Models for Latin American countries (except Brazil)

Refer to the Specifications section for information about standard features of the server.

Common to all models:

  • Power supplies are Platinum unless otherwise stated
  • All models include a Toolless Slide Rail Kit

Models for Asia Pacific region

The following table lists the models for the Asia Pacific region: Australia, Bangladesh, Brunei, Hong Kong, India, Japan, Korea, Sri Lanka, Malaysia, New Zealand, Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan, Vietnam

Table 7. Models for Asia Pacific markets
Model
Top Choice Stock
 AMD EPYC processor† Memory RAID Drive bays OCP Slots Power
supply		 Fans
Front VGA
Front diag
XCC2
Intru switch
Models with a 3-year warranty (machine type 7D76)
Models with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9E1004AP

 N 1x 9115 16C 125W 2.6G 1x32GB 2Rx8 940-8i 4GB 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 2x 750W 6x Perf Opt Opt Plat Yes

† Processor description: Processor model, number of cores, thermal design power (TDP), core frequency

Models for Australia and New Zealand

AP models: Customers in Australia and New Zealand also have access to the Asia Pacific region models.

Common to all Australia and New Zealand models:

  • All models include a Toolless Slide Rail Kit and Cable Management Arm
Table 8. Models for Australia and New Zealand
Model
Top Choice Stock
 AMD EPYC processor† Memory RAID Drive bays OCP Slots Power
supply		 Fans
Front VGA
Front diag
XCC2
Intru switch
Models with a 3-year warranty (machine type 7D76)
Models with 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9EA00ZAU

 N 1x 9124 16C 200W 3.0G 1x16GB 5350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x750W 6x Perf Yes Yes Std Opt

7D9EA010AU

 N 1x 9124 16C 200W 3.0G 1x32GB 2Rx8 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x750W 6x Perf Yes Yes Std Opt

† Processor description: Processor model, number of cores, thermal design power (TDP), core frequency

Models for Brazil

Table 9. Models for Brazil
Model
Top Choice Stock
 AMD EPYC processor† Memory RAID Drive bays OCP Slots Power
supply		 Fans
Front VGA
Front diag
XCC2
Intru switch
Models with a 3-year warranty (machine type 7D76)
Models with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9E1003BR

 N 1x 9115 16C 125W 2.6G 1x32GB 2Rx8 940-8i 4GB 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 2x 750W 6x Perf Opt Opt Plat Yes
Models with 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9EA027BR

 N 1x 9124 16C 200W 3.0G 1x32GB 2Rx8 540-8i 8x 2.5" SAS
1x 960GB VA MU SATA		 4-1G 5719 2x x16 Gen5 1x1100W 6x Std Opt Opt Plat Opt

† Processor description: Processor model, number of cores, thermal design power (TDP), core frequency

Models for EMEA region

Table 10. Models for EMEA region
Model
Top Choice Stock
 AMD EPYC processor† Memory RAID Drive bays OCP Slots Power
supply		 Fans
Front VGA
Front diag
XCC2
Intru switch
Models with a 3-year warranty (machine type 7D76)
Models with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9E1001EA

 N 1x 9115 16C 125W 2.6G 1x 32GB 2Rx8 940-8i 4GB 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 2x 750W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Opt Plat Yes
Models with 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9EA00NEA

 N 1x 9124 16C 200W 3.0G 1x64GB 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x1100W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Yes Std Opt

7D9EA00REA

 N 1x 9254 24C 200W 2.9G 1x64GB 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x1100W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Yes Std Opt

7D9EA00QEA

 N 1x 9354P 32C 280W 3.25G 1x64GB 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x1100W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Yes Std Opt

7D9EA00TEA

 N 1x 9454P 48C 290W 2.75G 1x64GB 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x1100W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Yes Std Opt

7D9EA00SEA

 N 1x 9554P 64C 360W 3.1G 1x64GB 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x1100W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Yes Std Opt

7D9EA00PEA

 N 1x 9654P 96C 360W 2.4G 1x64GB 9350-8i 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 1x1100W Titanium 6x Perf Opt Yes Std Opt

† Processor description: Processor model, number of cores, thermal design power (TDP), core frequency

Models for Latin American countries (except Brazil)

Table 11. Models with a 3-year warranty for Latin American countries (except Brazil)
Model
Top Choice Stock
 AMD EPYC processor† Memory RAID Drive bays OCP Slots Power
supply		 Fans
Front VGA
Front diag
XCC2
Intru switch
Models with a 3-year warranty (machine type 7D76)
Models with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors

7D9E1002LA

 N 1x 9115 16C 125W 2.6G 1x32GB 2Rx8 940-8i 4GB 8x 2.5" SAS Open bay Open 3 (x16, x8, x8) Gen4 2x 750W 6x Perf Opt Opt Plat Yes

† Processor description: Processor model, number of cores, thermal design power (TDP), core frequency

Processors

The SR655 V3 supports AMD EPYC processors. The server supports one processor.

Topics in this section:

  • Processor options
  • Processor features
  • Thermal requirements by processor
  • Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module - Open-loop liquid cooling
  • UEFI operating modes
  • Platform Secure Boot

Processor options

The SR655 V3 supports the following processor families:

  • 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors (formerly codenamed "Turin"):
    • Processors with Zen 5 architecture, with high per-core performance
    • Processors with Zen 5c architecture, with high core density and best power efficiency
  • 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors:
    • 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors (formerly codenamed "Genoa")
    • 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors with Zen 4c architecture (formerly codenamed "Bergamo"), with higher core counts, suitable for workloads like cloud-native applications

All supported processors have the following characteristics:

  • 12 DDR5 memory channels
  • 128 PCIe 5.0 I/O lanes, 64 lanes available for PCIe and NVMe devices

Configuration notes:

  • All 5th Gen processors support a 6400 MHz memory bus speed provided specific memory DIMMs are installed in the server and the latest system firmware is applied. See the table in the Memory options section to see which DIMMs support 6400 MHz. For all other DIMMs, the memory bus operates at 6000 MHz.

The following table lists the 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors supported by the SR655 V3. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

Table 12. 5th Gen AMD EPYC processor support
Feature
code		 SKU Description Top Choice
Express		 Quantity
supported
5th AMD EPYC processors ("Turin") with Zen 5 architecture
C2AF 9015 AMD EPYC 9015 8C 125W 3.6GHz Processor TCE 1
C2AG 9115 AMD EPYC 9115 16C 125W 2.6GHz Processor TCE 1
C2AK 9135 AMD EPYC 9135 16C 200W 3.65GHz Processor TCE 1
C2AR 9175F AMD EPYC 9175F 16C 320W 4.2GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AP 9255 AMD EPYC 9255 24C 200W 3.25GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AT 9275F AMD EPYC 9275F 24C 320W 4.1GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AQ 9335 AMD EPYC 9335 32C 210W 3.0GHz Processor TCE 1
C2AZ 9355 AMD EPYC 9355 32C 280W 3.55GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AV 9355P AMD EPYC 9355P 32C 280W 3.55GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AM 9365 AMD EPYC 9365 36C 300W 3.4GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AJ 9375F AMD EPYC 9375F 32C 320W 3.8GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2ND 9455 AMD EPYC 9455 48C 300W 3.15GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2NE 9455P AMD EPYC 9455P 48C 300W 3.15GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2A3 9475F AMD EPYC 9475F 48C 400W 3.65GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AL 9535 AMD EPYC 9535 64C 300W 2.4GHz Processor TCE 1
C2AY 9555 AMD EPYC 9555 64C 360W 3.2GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AW 9555P AMD EPYC 9555P 64C 360W 3.2GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AS 9565 AMD EPYC 9565 72C 400W 3.15GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C4H8 9575F AMD EPYC 9575F 64C 400W 3.3GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AU 9655 AMD EPYC 9655 96C 400W 2.6GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AX 9655P AMD EPYC 9655P 96C 400W 2.6GHz Processor Not TCE 1
5th AMD EPYC processors ("Turin") with Zen 5c architecture
C2AN 9645 AMD EPYC 9645 96C 320W 2.3GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AE 9745 AMD EPYC 9745 128C 400W 2.4GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2AH 9825 AMD EPYC 9825 144C 390W 2.2GHz Processor Not TCE 1
C2TD 9845 AMD EPYC 9845 160C 390W 2.1GHz Processor Not TCE 1

The following table lists the 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors supported by the SR655 V3.

Table 13. 4th Gen AMD EPYC processor support
Feature
code		 SKU Description Top Choice
Express		 Quantity
supported
4th Gen AMD EPYC processors ("Genoa")
BREE 9124 AMD EPYC 9124 16C 200W 3.0GHz Processor TCE 1
BREJ 9174F AMD EPYC 9174F 16C 320W 4.1GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BREH 9224 AMD EPYC 9224 24C 200W 2.5GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BRED 9254 AMD EPYC 9254 24C 200W 2.9GHz Processor TCE 1
BREF 9274F AMD EPYC 9274F 24C 320W 4.05GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BREC 9334 AMD EPYC 9334 32C 210W 2.7GHz Processor TCE 1
BR30 9354 AMD EPYC 9354 32C 280W 3.25GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BREG 9354P AMD EPYC 9354P 32C 280W 3.25GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BR32 9374F AMD EPYC 9374F 32C 320W 3.85GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BREB 9454 AMD EPYC 9454 48C 290W 2.75GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BREM 9454P AMD EPYC 9454P 48C 290W 2.75GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BR31 9474F AMD EPYC 9474F 48C 360W 3.6GHz Processor TCE 1
BREA 9534 AMD EPYC 9534 64C 280W 2.45GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BPVJ 9554 AMD EPYC 9554 64C 360W 3.1GHz Processor TCE 1
BREL 9554P AMD EPYC 9554P 64C 360W 3.1GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BR2Z 9634 AMD EPYC 9634 84C 290W 2.25GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BPVK 9654 AMD EPYC 9654 96C 360W 2.4GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BREK 9654P AMD EPYC 9654P 96C 360W 2.4GHz Processor Not TCE 1
4th Gen AMD EPYC processors with Zen 4c architecture ("Bergamo")
BW9S 9734 AMD EPYC 9734 112C 340W 2.2GHz Processor Not TCE 1
BW9T 9754 AMD EPYC 9754 128C 360W 2.25GHz Processor Not TCE 1

Processor features

The following table lists the features of the supported 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors.

6400 MHz memory support: The processors support memory up to 6400 MHz provided that specific memory DIMMs are installed in the server and the latest system firmware is applied. See the table in the Memory options section to see which DIMMs support 6400 MHz.

Table 14. Processor specifications - 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors
EPYC
model		 Cores /
Threads		 Base
Frequency		 Max Boost
Frequency†		 L3 Cache Memory
channels		 Memory
bus		 TDP
5th AMD EPYC processors ("Turin") with Zen 5 architecture
9015 8 / 16 3.6 GHz 4.1 GHz 64 MB 12 6400 MHz 125W
9115 16 / 32 2.6 GHz 4.4 GHz 64 MB 12 6400 MHz 125W
9135 16 / 32 3.65 GHz 4.3 GHz 64 MB 12 6400 MHz 200W
9175F 16 / 32 4.2 GHz 5 GHz 512 MB 12 6400 MHz 320W
9255 24 / 48 3.25 GHz 4.3 GHz 128 MB 12 6400 MHz 200W
9275F 24 / 48 4.1 GHz 4.8 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 320W
9335 32 / 64 3 GHz 4.4 GHz 128 MB 12 6400 MHz 210W
9355 32 / 64 3.55 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 280W
9355P 32 / 64 3.55 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 280W
9365 36 / 72 3.4 GHz 4.3 GHz 192 MB 12 6400 MHz 300W
9375F 32 / 64 3.8 GHz 4.8 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 320W
9455 48 / 96 3.15 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 300W
9455P 48 / 96 3.15 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 300W
9475F 48 / 96 3.65 GHz 4.8 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 400W
9535 64 / 128 2.4 GHz 4.3 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 300W
9555 64 / 128 3.2 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 360W
9555P 64 / 128 3.2 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 360W
9565 72 / 144 3.15 GHz 4.3 GHz 384 MB 12 6400 MHz 400W
9575F 64 / 128 3.3 GHz 5 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 400W
9655 96 / 192 2.6 GHz 4.5 GHz 384 MB 12 6400 MHz 400W
9655P 96 / 192 2.6 GHz 4.5 GHz 384 MB 12 6400 MHz 400W
5th AMD EPYC processors ("Turin") with Zen5c architecture
9645 96 / 192 2.3 GHz 3.7 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 320W
9745 128 / 256 2.4 GHz 3.7 GHz 256 MB 12 6400 MHz 400W
9825 144 / 288 2.2 GHz 3.7 GHz 384 MB 12 6400 MHz 390W
9845 160 / 320 2.1 GHz 3.7 GHz 320 MB 12 6400 MHz 390W

† The maximum single-core frequency that the processor is capable of operating

The following table lists the features of the supported 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors.

Table 15. Processor specifications - 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors
EPYC
model		 Cores /
Threads		 Base
Frequency		 Max Boost
Frequency†		 L3 Cache Memory
channels		 Memory
bus		 TDP
4th Gen AMD EPYC processors ("Genoa")
9124 16 / 32 3.0 GHz 3.7 GHz 64 MB 12 4800 MHz 200W
9174F 16 / 32 4.1 GHz 4.4 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 320W
9224 24 / 48 2.5 GHz 3.7 GHz 64 MB 12 4800 MHz 200W
9254 24 / 48 2.9 GHz 4.15 GHz 128 MB 12 4800 MHz 200W
9274F 24 / 48 4.05 GHz 4.3 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 320W
9334 32 / 64 2.7 GHz 3.9 GHz 128 MB 12 4800 MHz 210W
9354 32 / 64 3.25 GHz 3.8 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 280W
9354P 32 / 64 3.25 GHz 3.8 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 280W
9374F 32 / 64 3.85 GHz 4.3 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 320W
9454 48 / 96 2.75 GHz 3.8 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 290W
9454P 48 / 96 2.75 GHz 3.8 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 290W
9474F 48 / 96 3.6 GHz 4.1 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 360W
9534 64 / 128 2.45 GHz 3.7 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 280W
9554 64 / 128 3.1 GHz 3.75 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 360W
9554P 64 / 128 3.1 GHz 3.75 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 360W
9634 84 / 168 2.25 GHz 3.7 GHz 384 MB 12 4800 MHz 290W
9654 96 / 192 2.4 GHz 3.7 GHz 384 MB 12 4800 MHz 360W
9654P 96 / 192 2.4 GHz 3.7 GHz 384 MB 12 4800 MHz 360W
4th Gen AMD EPYC processors with Zen 4c architecture ("Bergamo")
9734 112 / 224 2.2 GHz 3.0 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 340W
9754 128 / 256 2.25 GHz 3.2 GHz 256 MB 12 4800 MHz 360W

† The maximum single-core frequency that the processor is capable of operating

Thermal requirements by processor

In the SR655 V3, the processor either uses a standard heatsink or a performance heatsink depending on the TDP of the processor. Performance heatsinks include two satellite heatsinks that connect to the main heatsink via liquid filled copper tubes.

Additional ambient temperature restrictions may apply. See the Operating environment section for details.

Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module - Open-loop liquid cooling

The SR655 V3 also supports advanced direct-water cooling (DWC) capability with the Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module. This module implements a liquid cooling solution where heat from the processors is removed from the rack and the data center using an open loop and coolant distribution units.

With the Processor Neptune Core Module, all heat generated by the processors is removed from the server using water. This means that the server fans and data center air conditioning units only need to remove the heat generated by the other components. This results in lower air conditioning costs and it enables the use of slower fans which results in lower overall power consumption.

The following figure shows the Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module.

Lenovo Neptune Processor DWC Module
Figure 6. Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module

The Processor Neptune Core Module also includes a leak detection module which can detect a leakage of more than 0.5ml (about 10 drops) along the length of the tube and then issue an event to the XClarity Controller. XCC will then post an error to the System Event Log and enable further actions. Once the liquid evaporates, a further event is issue to XCC.

The Processor Neptune Core Module is only available in CTO orders, not as a field upgrade. Ordering information is listed in the following table.

Table 16. Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
CTO only C1PM* ThinkSystem SR655 V3/SR635 V3 Processor Neptune Core Module Not TCE

* In DCSC, this feature code is listed in the Processor tab

Configuration notes:

  • The Processor Neptune Core Module requires water infrastructure be available in the rack cabinet and data center, as described in the Water infrastructure section.
  • All processor SKUs are supported
  • All front drive bay configurations are supported
  • Slot 6 is not available for adapters - the water loop is routed through the space otherwise occupied by slot 6
  • Rear drive bays are supported
  • 7mm drive bays are supported only in slot 3
  • M.2 adapters are supported based on the configurations in the Storage configurations section
  • Standard fans can be configured in most configurations
  • The use of a cable management arm (CMA) is not supported

For more information, see the Thermal Rules page:
https://pubs.lenovo.com/sr655-v3/thermal_rules

The following figure shows the Lenovo Neptune Processor DWC Module installed in the SR655 V3.

Lenovo Neptune Processor DWC Module installed in the SR655 V3
Figure 7. Lenovo Neptune Processor DWC Module installed in the SR655 V3

UEFI operating modes

The SR655 V3 offers preset operating modes that affect energy consumption and performance. These modes are a collection of predefined low-level UEFI settings that simplify the task of tuning the server to suit your business and workload requirements.

The following table lists the feature codes that allow you to specify the mode you wish to preset in the factory for CTO orders.

UK and EU customers: For compliance with the ERP Lot9 regulation, you should select feature BFYA. For some systems, you may not be able to make a selection, in which case, it will be automatically derived by the configurator.

Table 17. UEFI operating mode presets in DCSC
Feature code Description Top Choice Express
BFYA Operating mode selection for: "Maximum Efficiency Mode" TCE
BFYB Operating mode selection for: "Maximum Performance Mode" TCE

The preset modes for the SR655 V3 are as follows:

  • Maximum Efficiency Mode (feature BFYA): Maximizes performance/watt efficiency while maintaining reasonable performance
  • Maximum Performance Mode (feature BFYB): Achieves maximum performance but with higher power consumption and lower energy efficiency.

For details about these preset modes, and all other performance and power efficiency UEFI settings offered in the SR655 V3, see the paper "Tuning UEFI Settings for Performance and Energy Efficiency on AMD Processor-Based ThinkSystem Servers", available from https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1267.

Platform Secure Boot

Platform Secure Boot (PSB) is a feature of AMD EPYC processors that helps defend against threats to firmware. It is designed to provide protection in response to growing firmware-level remote attacks being seen across the industry. AMD Secure Boot extends the AMD silicon root of trust to help protect the system by establishing an unbroken chain of trust from the AMD silicon root of trust to the BIOS. The UEFI secure boot helps continue the chain of trust from the system BIOS to the OS Bootloader. This feature helps defend against remote attackers seeking to embed malware into firmware.

With PSB enabled, the processor is cryptographically bound to the server firmware code signing key once the processors are installed in the server and the server is powered on. From that point on, that processor can only be used with motherboards that use the same code signing key.

Disabling PSB will stop the protection against remote and local attackers seeking to embed malware into a platform’s firmware, BIOS and even UEFI functions. Disabling PSB also allows you to install the processor in another server that you purchased from Lenovo, however, we do not recommend you do this by yourself. Please contact the Lenovo service team for further assistance. 

By default, the server has Platform Secure Boot enabled on the installed processors, however for factory orders, you can choose to have the server with PSB disabled. To do this, select feature code C18D as listed in the following table. PSB can be later enabled in System Setup if desired.

Cannot be disabled once enabled: Once you enable PSB in a server, it cannot be disabled on those processors.

Table 18. Platform Secure Boot
Feature code Description Purpose
C0DF Platform Secure Boot Enable PSB is enabled in the factory and cannot later be disabled. Default choice in DCSC.
C18D Platform Secure Boot Disable PSB is not enabled in the factory. It can be later enabled in UEFI System Setup if desired.

If you add a second processor as a field upgrade and your server has PSB enabled, then as soon as you install the processor and power the server on, the processor is then cryptographically bound to the server, and can only be used in that server going forward.

Note: Platform Secure Boot (PSB) is different from the Secure Boot security feature described in the Platform Firmware Resiliency section.

Memory options

The SR655 V3 uses Lenovo TruDDR5 memory operating at up to 6400 MHz with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors, and up to 4800 MHz with 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors. The server supports up to 12 DIMMs. The processor has 12 memory channels and supports 1 DIMM per channel. The server supports up to 3TB of memory using 12x 256GB 3DS RDIMMs.

Lenovo TruDDR5 memory uses the highest quality components that are sourced from Tier 1 DRAM suppliers and only memory that meets the strict requirements of Lenovo is selected. It is compatibility tested and tuned to maximize performance and reliability. From a service and support standpoint, Lenovo TruDDR5 memory automatically assumes the system warranty, and Lenovo provides service and support worldwide.

The following table lists the memory options supported in the SR655 V3 with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors.

The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

Table 19. Memory options for 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Maximum
speed		 DRAM
technology
x4 RDIMMs
4X77A93526 C1PL ThinkSystem 32GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (1Rx4) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77A93528 C0CK ThinkSystem 64GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77A93533 C0CP ThinkSystem 96GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 24Gb
4X77A93529 C0CL ThinkSystem 128GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 32Gb
4X77B09750 CBN9 ThinkSystem SR635 V3/SR655 V3 32GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (1Rx4) RDIMM-A v2 TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77B09643 CBFR ThinkSystem SR635 V3/SR655 V3 64GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A v2 TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77B07424 CA1Q ThinkSystem 96GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A v2 Not TCE 6400 MHz 24Gb
4X77B07421 CA1M ThinkSystem 128GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A v2 Not TCE 6400 MHz 32Gb
x8 RDIMMs
4X77A93525 C0CH ThinkSystem 16GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (1Rx8) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77A93527 C0CJ ThinkSystem 32GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx8) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77A93532 C0CN ThinkSystem 48GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx8) RDIMM-A Not TCE 6000 MHz 24Gb
4X77B10268 CC0B ThinkSystem SR635 V3/SR655 V3 16GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (1Rx8) RDIMM-A v2 Not TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
4X77B09751 CBNA ThinkSystem SR635 V3/SR655 V3 32GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (2Rx8) RDIMM-A v2 TCE 6400 MHz 16Gb
10x4 3DS RDIMMs
4X77B07422 CA1N ThinkSystem 256GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (4Rx4) 3DS RDIMM-A Not TCE 6400 MHz 32Gb

The following table lists the memory options supported in the SR655 V3 with 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors.

Table 20. Memory options for 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Maximum
speed		 DRAM
technology
9x4 RDIMMs
4X77A81442 BQ36 ThinkSystem 64GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (2Rx4) 9x4 RDIMM-A Not TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
10x4 RDIMMs
4X77A81438 BQ39 ThinkSystem 32GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (1Rx4) 10x4 RDIMM-A Not TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
4X77A81441 BQ3D ThinkSystem 64GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (2Rx4) 10x4 RDIMM-A TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
4X77A81448 BUVV ThinkSystem 96GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (2Rx4) 10x4 RDIMM-A Not TCE 4800 MHz 24Gb
4X77A96982 C467 ThinkSystem 128GB TruDDR5 5600MHz (2Rx4) RDIMM-A Not TCE 4800 MHz 32Gb
x8 RDIMMs
4X77A81437 BQ3C ThinkSystem 16GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (1Rx8) RDIMM-A Not TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
4X77A81440 BQ37 ThinkSystem 32GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (2Rx8) RDIMM-A TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
4X77A81447 BUVU ThinkSystem 48GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (2Rx8) RDIMM-A Not TCE 4800 MHz 24Gb
10x4 3DS RDIMMs
4X77A81443 BQ3A ThinkSystem 128GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (4Rx4) 3DS RDIMM-A v2 Not TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
4X77A81444 BQ3B ThinkSystem 256GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (8Rx4) 3DS RDIMM-A v2 Not TCE 4800 MHz 16Gb
CTO only BZPN ThinkSystem 256GB TruDDR5 4800MHz (8Rx4) 3DS RDIMM-A v1 Not TCE 4800 MHz 32Gb

9x4 RDIMMs (also known as Optimized or EC4 RDIMMs) are a lower-cost DDR5 memory option supported in ThinkSystem V3 servers. 9x4 DIMMs offer the same performance as standard RDIMMs (known as 10x4 or EC8 modules), however they support lower fault-tolerance characteristics. Standard RDIMMs and 3DS RDIMMs support two 40-bit subchannels (that is, a total of 80 bits), whereas 9x4 RDIMMs support two 36-bit subchannels (a total of 72 bits). The extra bits in the subchannels allow standard RDIMMs and 3DS RDIMMs to support Single Device Data Correction (SDDC), however 9x4 RDIMMs do not support SDDC. Note, however, that all DDR5 DIMMs, including 9x4 RDIMMs, support Bounded Fault correction, which enables the server to correct most common types of DRAM failures.

For more information on DDR5 memory, see the Lenovo Press paper, Introduction to DDR5 Memory, available from https://lenovopress.com/lp1618.

The following rules apply when selecting the memory configuration:

  • Memory rated at 4800 MHz is only supported with 4th Gen processors. Memory rated at 6400 MHz memory is only supported with 5th Gen processors (and operates at 6000 MHz or 6400 MHz as indicated in the table).
  • The SR655 V3 supports quantities 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 DIMMs per processor; other quantities not supported
  • The server supports four types of DIMMs: 9x4 RDIMMs, 10x4 RDIMMs, x8 RDIMMs and 3DS RDIMMs
    • UDIMMs and LRDIMMs are not supported
  • Mixing of DIMM types is not supported (for example, 9x4 DIMMs with 10x4 RDIMMs)
  • Mixing x4 and x8 DIMMs is not supported
  • Mixing of DRAM technology (16Gb, 24Gb, 32Gb) is not supported. See the column in the above table.
  • Mixing of 128GB 3DS RDIMMs and 256GB 3DS RDIMMs is not supported
  • Mixing of DIMM rank counts is supported. Follow the required installation order installing the DIMMs with the higher rank counts first.
  • Mixing of DIMM capacities is supported, however only two different capacities are supported across all channels of the processor (eg 16GB and 32GB). Follow the required installation order installing the larger DIMMs first.
  • Memory operates at the speed of the memory bus of the processor (see the Processor features section for specifics), or the maximum speed that the memory DIMMs support (see the above tables), whichever is lower

  • The use of the 128GB 3D RDIMM feature BYEE has additional ambient temperature requirements; see https://pubs.lenovo.com/sr655-v3/thermal_rules for information

  • When adding the ThinkSystem 256GB TruDDR5 6400MHz (4Rx4) 3DS RDIMM-A (4X77B07422) as a field upgrade, follow the instructions in Support tip TT3220

Note: Memory mirroring and memory rank sparing are not supported.

For best performance, consider the following:

  • Ensure the memory installed is at least the same speed as the memory bus of the selected processor.
  • Populate all 12 memory channels with identical DIMMs (same Lenovo part number)

The following memory protection technologies are supported:

  • ECC detection/correction
  • Bounded Fault detection/correction
  • SDDC (for x4-based memory DIMMs; look for "x4" in the DIMM description. Not supported with 9x4 RDIMMs)
  • Patrol/Demand Scrubbing
  • DRAM Address Command Parity with Replay
  • DRAM Uncorrected ECC Error Retry
  • On-die ECC
  • ECC Error Check and Scrub (ECS)
  • Post Package Repair

Memory DIMM filler

When a GPU (or another high-thermal component) is added as a field upgrade, all empty DIMM slots must have a DIMM filler (also called a dummy DIMM or DIMM blank) installed in each DIMM slot, to ensure the optimal air flow. Ordering information is in the following table. For CTO orders, the DIMM fillers are derived by the configurator.

Table 21. ThinkSystem Dummy DIMM Package Kit
Part number Feauture code Description
4M27A11810 AURS* ThinkSystem Dummy DIMM Package Kit
(contains 24x DIMM fillers)

* In CTO orders, feature code AURS is derived and is 1x DIMM filler

Internal storage

The SR655 V3 has three drive bay zones and supports up to 20x 3.5-inch or 40x 2.5-inch hot-swap drive bays or a combination of drive bays, depending on the selected chassis and backplane configuration. The server also supports configurations without any drive bays if desired.

The three drive bay zones are as follows:

  • Front:
    • Up to 12x 3.5-inch hot-swap bays, or
    • Up to 24x 2.5-inch hot-swap bays
  • Middle:
    • 4x 3.5-inch hot-swap bays, or
    • 8x 2.5-inch hot-swap bays
  • Rear:
    • Up to 4x 3.5-inch hot-swap bays, or
    • Up to 8x 2.5-inch hot-swap bays
    • Also supports 2x 7mm hot-swap drives bays

All drives are hot-swap and are accessible from the front, from the rear, or from drive bays that are located in the middle of the server (accessible when you remove the top cover of the server).

The server also supports one or two M.2 drives, installed in an M.2 adapter internal to the server.

In this section:

  • NVMe drive support
  • Tri-Mode support - RAID 940 and RAID 9450 adapters
  • Front drive bays
  • Mid drive bays
  • Rear drive bays
  • Storage configurations
  • Field upgrades
  • RAID flash power module (supercap) support
  • 7mm drives
  • M.2 drives
  • SED encryption key management with SKLM
  • Encryption Enablement

NVMe drive support

The SR655 V3 supports NVMe drives to maximize storage performance.

  • Up to 24 NVMe drives in a 2.5-inch drive configuration, without oversubscription (that is, each x4 drive has a dedicated x4 (4 lanes) connection to the processor, either direct to the processor or via a retimer adapter)
    • Up to 24 installed in front bays
  • Up to 32 NVMe drives in a 2.5-inch drive configuration, with oversubscription (using NVMe switch adapters)
    • 24 installed in front bays
    • 8 installed in mid-chassis bays
  • Up to 8 NVMe drives in a 3.5-inch drive configuration, without oversubscription
    • All installed in mid bays

Riser 3 support with onboard NVMe: When Riser 3 is configured, only up to 4x NVMe drives can be connected using the onboard NVMe connections.

The specifics of these configurations are covered in the Storage configurations section. The tables in those sections indicate the number of NVMe drives in each configuration.

In addition, the SR655 V3 supports two 7mm NVMe drives for use as boot drives.

Tri-Mode support - RAID 940 and RAID 9450 adapters

The RAID 940 and RAID 9450 adapters support NVMe through a feature named Tri-Mode support (or Trimode support). This feature enables the use of NVMe U.3 drives at the same time as SAS and SATA drives. Tri-Mode requires an AnyBay backplane. Cabling of the controller to the backplanes is the same as with SAS/SATA drives, and the NVMe drives are connected via a PCIe x1 link to the controller.

NVMe drives connected using Tri-Mode support provide better performance than SAS or SATA drives: A SATA SSD has a data rate of 6Gbps, a SAS SSD has a data rate of 12Gbps, whereas an NVMe U.3 Gen 4 SSD with a PCIe x1 link will have a data rate of 16Gbps. NVMe drives typically also have lower latency and higher IOPS compared to SAS and SATA drives. Tri-Mode is supported with U.3 NVMe drives and requires an AnyBay backplane.

Tri-Mode requires U.3 drives: Only NVMe drives with a U.3 interface are supported. U.2 drives are not supported. See the Internal drive options section for the U.3 drives supported by the server.

NVMe x4 support (not Tri-Mode): As an alternative to Tri-Mode support, the RAID 9450-32i adapter supports connectivity to either NVMe U.2 and U.3 drives using a PCIe Gen4 x4 connection. A x4 connection to each drive enables maximum performance from the NVMe drives. Note that a x4 connection requires different cabling than a Tri-Mode connection. Only NVMe drives are supported; SAS and SATA drives are not supported.

New as of July 2026: To enable Tri-Mode in CTO orders of the SR655 V3, use the following feature code:

Table 22. Tri-Mode Enablement
Feature code Description
CH5Z Tri-Mode Enablement

The process to configure Tri-Mode for a CTO order in DCSC is as follows:

  1. In the Storage tab, select one of the 940-8i or 940-16i controllers from the SAS/SATA RAID Controller group
  2. In the Internal Storage tab, select select Tri-Mode Enablement (feature CH5Z)
  3. You can then select either NVMe or SATA or SATA drives or any combination of these drives, up to the number supported by the server and the backplanes selected.

Tips:

  • Feature CH5Z is not selectable until one of the 940-8i or 940-16i adapters in SAS/SATA RAID Controller group is selected.
  • Feature CH5Z is not selectable if Non RAID NVMe (BC4V) is selected.
  • The existing Tri-Mode "for U.3" adapter feature codes (features BGM1, BGM0, BM36, BDY4) in the Tri-Mode Controller group are for existing orders only and are being phased out (deprecated)

Front drive bays

The front drive bay zone supports the following configurations:

  • 8x or 12x 3.5-inch drive bays (all hot-swap)
  • 8x, 16x or 24x 2.5-inch drive bays (all hot-swap)
  • 4x 2.5-inch drive bays (all hot-swap) with support for front PCIe slots
  • No backplanes and no drives (supports field upgrades)

The specific combinations that are supported in the SR655 V3 are shown in the following figures. The feature codes listed in the figures are the backplane feature codes when ordering CTO and correspond to the feature codes listed in the table below the figure. In the figures, G4 refers to PCIe Gen4 and G5 refers to PCIe Gen5.

Note: Backplane B8LT is withdrawn.

SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 3.5-inch drive bays
Figure 8. SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 3.5-inch drive bays

SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 2.5-inch drive bays, all the same drive type
Figure 9. SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 2.5-inch drive bays, all the same drive type

SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 2.5-inch drive bays, combinations
Figure 10. SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 2.5-inch drive bays, combinations

SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 2.5-inch drive bays with front PCIe slots
Figure 11. SR655 V3 front drive bay configurations - 2.5-inch drive bays with front PCIe slots

The backplanes used to provide these drive bays are listed in the following table. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

Field upgrades: All front backplanes are available as part numbers for field upgrades along with require cable option kits, as described in the Field upgrades section below.

Table 23. Backplanes for front drive bays
Feature Description Top Choice
Express		 Bays PCIe
Gen		 SAS
Gen		 Max
qty
Front 3.5-inch drive backplanes
B8LP ThinkSystem 2U 8x3.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Not TCE 8 - 12Gb 1
B8LT ThinkSystem 2U 12x3.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Not TCE 12 - 12Gb 1
BPL8 ThinkSystem 2U 8x3.5" SAS/SATA+4 AnyBay Backplane Not TCE 12 Gen4 24Gb 1
BPL9 ThinkSystem 2U 8x3.5" SAS/SATA+4 NVMe Backplane Not TCE 12 Gen4 24Gb 1
BQ2S ThinkSystem 2U 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Rear 4-Bay Expander Backplane Not TCE 12* - 12Gb 1
BH8C ThinkSystem 2U 12x3.5" AnyBay Backplane Not TCE 12 Gen4 24Gb 1
Front 2.5-inch backplanes
B8LU ThinkSystem 2U 8x2.5" SAS/SATA Backplane TCE 8 - 12Gb 3
BQ2T ThinkSystem 2U 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Rear 4-Bay Expander Backplane Not TCE 24 - 12Gb 1
BH8D ThinkSystem 2U/4U 8x2.5" NVMe Backplane TCE 8 Gen4 24Gb 3
BS7Y ThinkSystem V3 2U 8x2.5" NVMe Gen5 Backplane TCE 8 Gen5 24Gb 3
BH8B ThinkSystem 2U/4U 8x2.5" AnyBay Backplane TCE 8 Gen4 24Gb 3
BLL2 ThinkSystem V3 2U 8x2.5" AnyBay Gen5 Backplane TCE 8 Gen5 24Gb 1
BPL7 ThinkSystem 2U 6x2.5" SAS/SATA+2 AnyBay Backplane Not TCE 8 Gen4 24Gb 1
BS7Z ThinkSystem 2U 6x2.5" SAS/SATA+2 AnyBay Gen5 Backplane TCE 8 Gen5 24Gb 1
BQQD ThinkSystem 2U 2.5" 6 SAS/SATA+2 NVMe Backplane Not TCE 8 Gen4 24Gb 1
BS80 ThinkSystem 2U 6x2.5" SAS/SATA+2 NVMe Gen5 Backplane Not TCE 8 Gen5 24Gb 1
Integrated Diagnostics Panel (for 2.5-inch configurations with 8 or 16 bays only)
BMJA ThinkSystem 2U 16x2.5" Front Operator Panel v2 TCE - - 12Gb 1

* Backplane has an onboard SAS expander that provides connectivity to SAS/SATA drive bays in a separate rear backplane (order the rear backplane separately). See also note below for BQ2T.

The use of front drive bays has the following configuration rules:

  • The SR655 V3 also supports configurations without any drive bays, allowing for drive bay upgrades as described in the field upgrades section.
  • If 3.5-inch front drive bays are used, an internal (CFF) RAID adapter or HBA is not supported as the adapter and bays occupy the same physical space
  • Any 8x 2.5-inch and 16x 2.5-inch drive configuration (SAS/SATA, AnyBay, or NVMe) can optionally be configured for use with the Integrated Diagnostics Panel as described in the Local management section. 3.5-inch drive configurations do not support the Integrated Diagnostics Panel. With the Integrated Diagnostics Display, 8-bay configurations can be upgrade to 16 bays, however 16-bay configurations cannot be upgrade to 24 bays.
  • If you are building a server configuration that includes the ThinkSystem 2U 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Rear 4-Bay Expander Backplane (feature BQ2T) and the order also includes a rack cabinet, then you can configure at most 6 drives to be installed in the factory. The remaining drives must be ordered separately using the option part numbers for the drives. This requirement does not apply if the order does not include a rack cabinet. The requirement is due to the shock/vibration limits of the 24x 2.5-inch backplane.
  • The following backplanes with integrated SAS expanders are not supported with cluster applications. For more information see Support Tip TT3693:
    • ThinkSystem 2U 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Rear 4-Bay Expander Backplane (BQ2S)
    • ThinkSystem 2U 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Rear 4-Bay Expander Backplane (BQ2T)

Mid drive bays

The SR655 V3 supports hot-swap drives installed in the middle of the server chassis. The drive bays are accessible by removing the top lid of the server and levering the mid drive chassis up at the front.

The following configurations are supported:

  • 4x 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 8x 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 8x 2.5-inch hot-swap NVMe drive bays

The drive bays in the open position are shown in the following figure.

M.2 support: When mid drive bays are configured, the M.2 adapter is installed on the mid drive bay mechanical as shown in the images.

SR665 Mid-chassis drive bays
Figure 12. Mid-chassis drive bays

The backplanes used to provide these drive bays are listed in the following table.

Table 24. Backplanes for mid drive bays
Feature Description Top Choice
Express		 Bays PCIe
Gen		 Maximum
supported
Mid 3.5-inch backplanes
BCQK ThinkSystem 2U 4x3.5" SAS/SATA Middle Backplane Not TCE 4 - 1
Mid 2.5-inch backplanes
BCQL ThinkSystem 2U 4x2.5" SAS/SATA Middle Backplane Not TCE 4 - 2‡
BDY7 ThinkSystem 2U 4x2.5" Middle NVMe Backplane Not TCE 4 Gen4 2‡
BS81 ThinkSystem 2U 4x2.5" Middle NVMe Gen5 Backplane Not TCE 4 Gen5 2‡

‡ 2.5-inch drive backplanes for the mid-chassis area must be installed in pairs and cannot be mixed.

Field upgrades: Backplanes are available as part numbers for field upgrades along with require cable option kits, as described in the Field upgrades section below.

The use of drive bays in the mid-chassis area has the following configuration rules:

  • All processors are supported. Higher TDP processors will require the performance heatsinks.
  • Full-length adapter cards are not supported
  • GPUs (including low profile GPUs such as the T4) are not supported
  • The use of mid drive bays may require Riser 1 or Riser 2 be installed, since power for the mid bay backplanes comes from a riser

Rear drive bays

The SR655 V3 supports hot-swap drives installed at the rear of the server chassis. Supported configurations are as follows:

  • 3.5-inch hot-swap drives
    • 2x SAS/SATA drive bays
    • 4x SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 2.5-inch hot-swap drives
    • 4x SAS/SATA drive bays
    • 4x AnyBay drive bays
    • 8x SAS/SATA drive bays

The configurations are shown in the following figure.

SR655 V3 rear drive bay configurations
Figure 13. Rear 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive bay configurations

The backplanes used to provide these drive bays are listed in the following table.

Table 25. Backplanes for rear drive bays
Feature Description Top Choice
Express		 Bays PCIe
Gen		 Maximum
supported
Rear 3.5-inch backplanes
B8L3 ThinkSystem 1U/2U 4x3.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Not TCE 4 - 1
BAG7 ThinkSystem 2U 2x3.5" SAS/SATA Rear Backplane Not TCE 2 - 1
Rear 2.5-inch backplanes
B8LV ThinkSystem 2U 4x2.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Not TCE 4 - 1
B97X ThinkSystem 2U 8x2.5" SAS/SATA Rear Backplane Not TCE 8 - 1
BQ2U ThinkSystem V3 1U/2U 4x2.5" AnyBay Backplane Not TCE 4 Gen4 1
BSE3 ThinkSystem 4x2.5" AnyBay Gen5 Backplane Not TCE 4 Gen5 1

Field upgrades: Backplanes are available as part numbers for field upgrades along with require cable option kits, as described in the Field upgrades section below.

In addition, the server supports two 7mm-thickness hot-swap SSDs which are installed in place of either slot 3 or slot 6 (not both). These 7mm drives can be used in conjunction with any rear drive 2.5-inch or 3.5-inch bay combination. See the 7mm drives section for details.

The use of rear drive bays has the following configuration rules:

  • The use of rear bays restricts the number of slots and the choice of risers that are supported. See the I/O expansion section for details.
  • The 7mm rear drive kit is supported in either slot 3 or slot 6 but not both at the same time.
  • The 7mm drive enclosure is connected to an onboard connectors and cannot be connected to any installed RAID adapter or HBA.

Storage configurations

This section describes the various combinations of front and rear drives that the server supports, as well as M.2 support.

Tip: These tables are based on Storage matrix in TRD V10.7

In this section:

  • Overview of configurations - 3.5-inch front drive bays
  • Overview of configurations - 2.5-inch front drive bays
  • Details - 3.5-inch front drive bays
  • Details - 2.5-inch front drive bays

The following tables summarize the storage configurations for the SR655 V3. For details, including processor requirements, M.2 and 7mm support, and controller selections, see each of the Details tables.

Overview - 3.5-inch front drives

The following table summarizes the configurations that use 3.5-inch front drive bays.

Click to jump down to the details of the 3.5-inch front drive configurations.

Return to Storage configurations.

Table 26. Overview - 3.5-inch front drives
Config Total
drives
(NVMe)		 Front Middle Rear Backplanes
SAS/SATA
AnyBay
NVMe
EDSFF
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" NVMe
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" AnyBay
2.5" NVMe
1 8 (0) 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LP)
2 12 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT)
2 12 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S)
3 14 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 2x3.5" SAS/SATA (BAG7)
3 14 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 2x3.5" SAS/SATA (BAG7)
4 16 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3)
4 16 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3)
4 16 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3)
4 16 (4) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U)
5 16 (0) 12 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (BCQK)
6 16 (0) 12 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL)
7 16 (4) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U)
8 20 (8) 12 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" NVMe G4 (BDY7)
9 20 (0) 12 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (BCQK); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3)
9 20 (0) 12 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Mid: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (BCQK); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3)
10 12 (4) 8 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" (8xSAS/SATA 4xAnyBay G4) (BPL8)
11 12 (4) 8 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" (8xSAS/SATA 4xNVMe G4) (BPL9)
36 16 (4) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3)
37 16 (4) 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3)
38 20 (8) 12 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS81)

Overview - 2.5-inch front drives

The following table summarizes the configurations that use 2.5-inch front drives.

Click to jump down to the details of the 2.5-inch front drive configurations.

Return to Storage configurations.

Front PCI slots: Front PCIe slots can be selected with configurations of 8x 2.5-inch or 16x 2.5-inch front drive bays.

Table 27. Overview - 2.5-inch front drives
Config Total
drives
(NVMe)		 Front Middle Rear Backplanes
SAS/SATA
AnyBay
NVMe
EDSFF
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" NVMe
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" AnyBay
2.5" NVMe
13 8 (0) 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU)
14 8 (8) 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B)
14 8 (2) 6 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xAnyBay G4) (BPL7)
14 8 (2) 6 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xNVMe G4) (BQQD)
15 8 (8) 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
16 16 (0) 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU)
17 16 (16) 0 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) + 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
18 16 (16) 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
19 16 (8) 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B)
20 16 (8) 8 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
21 24 (8) 16 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B)
22 24 (8) 16 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
23 24 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU)
24 24 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T)
25 28 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL)
26 32 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL)
27 24 (24) 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
28 24 (24) 0 8 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) + 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D)
29 28 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LV)
29 28 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LV)
29 28 (4) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U)
29 28 (4) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U)
30 32 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B97X)
30 32 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B97X)
31 32 (32) 0 0 24 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" NVMe G4 (BDY7)
32 36 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 4 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL); Rear: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LV)
33 40 (0) 24 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL); Rear: 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B97X)
35 8 (8) 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B)
35 16 (16) 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B)
35 24 (24) 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B)
39 8 (8) 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2)
39 8 (2) 6 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xAnyBay G5) (BS7Z)
39 8 (2) 6 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xNVMe G5) (BS80)
40 8 (8) 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
40 16 (16) 0 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) + 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
41 16 (16) 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
42 16 (8) 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2)
43 16 (8) 8 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
45 24 (8) 16 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2)
46 24 (8) 16 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
47 24 (24) 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
48 24 (24) 0 8 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) + 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y)
49 28 (4) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3)
49 28 (4) 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3)

Details - 3.5-inch front bays

The following table details the configurations that use 3.5-inch front drive bays.

Click to go to the overview of the 3.5-inch front drive configurations.

Return to Storage configurations.

Table 28. Details - 3.5-inch front bays
Cfg Front Middle Rear Backplanes M.2 Supported controllers
SAS/SATA
AnyBay
NVMe
EDSFF
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" NVMe
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" AnyBay
2.5" NVMe
1a 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LP) Yes OB SATA
1d Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
2a 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT) Yes (no M.2 x4 NVMe) OB SATA
2d Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
2g 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S) Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
3a 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 2x3.5" SAS/SATA (BAG7) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB SATA
3d Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
3h 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 2x3.5" SAS/SATA (BAG7) Yes 540-8i or 940-8i
4b 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3) Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
4e 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3) Yes 540-8i or 940-8i
4g 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3) Yes (no M.2 x4 NVMe) OB SATA + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
4h Yes (no M.2 x4) OB SATA
4j 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U) Yes OB NVMe + 540-8i or 940-8i
5b 12 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (BCQK) Yes (no M.2 x4) 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
6b 12 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL) Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
7b 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U) Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
8a 12 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" NVMe G4 (BDY7) Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
9a 12 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (BCQK); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3) Yes (no M.2 x4) 940-32i
9p 12 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Mid: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (BCQK); Rear: 4x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8L3) Yes (no M.2 x4) 540-16i or 940-16i
10b 8 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" (8xSAS/SATA 4xAnyBay G4) (BPL8) Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
11b 8 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12x3.5" (8xSAS/SATA 4xNVMe G4) (BPL9) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
11d Yes OB SATA + OB NVMe
36b 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2S); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3) Yes OB NVMe + 540-8i or 940-8i
37b 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3) Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
38a 12 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 Front: 12x3.5" SAS/SATA (B8LT); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS81) Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i

Details - 2.5-inch front bays

The following table details the configurations that use 2.5-inch front bays.

Click to go to the overview of the 2.5-inch front drive configurations.

Return to Storage configurations.

Front PCI slots: Front PCIe slots can be selected with configurations of 8x 2.5-inch or 16x 2.5-inch front drive bays.

Table 29. Details - 2.5-inch front bays
Cfg Front Middle Rear Backplanes M.2 Supported controllers
SAS/SATA
AnyBay
NVMe
EDSFF
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" NVMe
3.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" SAS/SATA
2.5" AnyBay
2.5" NVMe
13a 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) Yes OB SATA
13c Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
13f Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
13h Yes 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
14b 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
14e Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
14h 6 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xAnyBay G4) (BPL7) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
14j 6 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xNVMe G4) (BQQD) Yes OB SATA + OB NVMe
15a 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes OB NVMe
16a 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB SATA
16c Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
16e Yes 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
16f Yes 440-16i
17b 0 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) + 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + Retimer G4
18a 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + Retimer G4
19a 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB SATA + OB NVMe
19c Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
19f Yes OB NVMe + 2x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
20a 8 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes OB SATA + OB NVMe
20c Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
21a 16 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) Yes OB NVMe + 940-32i
21c Yes OB NVMe + 3x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
22a 16 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes OB NVMe + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
22b Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i
22c Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
22f Yes OB NVMe + 2x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
23a 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) Yes 940-32i
23f Yes 3x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
23h Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
24b 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T) Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
25a 24 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL) Yes 940-32i
25b Yes 2x (440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i)
26a 24 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL) Yes 940-32i
26b Yes 2x (440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i)
27a 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + 3x Retimer G4
28a 0 8 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) + 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 3x Retimer G4
29a 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LV) Yes 940-32i
29b Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
29d Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 440-16i
29f Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i + 48-port Expander CFF
29i Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 48-port Expander CFF
29l 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LV) Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
29n 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U) Yes OB NVMe + 940-32i
29o Yes OB NVMe + 48-port Expander CFF + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
29q Yes OB NVMe + 48-port Expander CFF + 440-16i
29s Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i + 48-port Expander CFF
29v Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 48-port Expander CFF
29y 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BQ2U) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
30a 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B97X) Yes 940-32i
30b Yes 2x (440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i)
30e Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
30g Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 440-16i
30i Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i + 48-port Expander CFF
30l Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 48-port Expander CFF
30n Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
30p 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B97X) Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
30r Yes 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
30s Yes 440-16i
31a 0 0 24 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" NVMe G4 (BH8D); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" NVMe G4 (BDY7) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + Retimer G4 + 2x NVMe Switch
32a 24 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 4 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL); Rear: 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LV) Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 940-32i
32b Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
32d Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 440-16i
32g Yes 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 48-port Expander CFF
33a 24 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Mid: 2x 4x2.5" SAS/SATA (BCQL); Rear: 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B97X) Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
33c Yes 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i + 48-port Expander CFF
33e Yes 48-port Expander CFF + 440-16i
35a 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) Yes 940-8i Tri-Mode
35b 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) Yes 2x 940-8i Tri-Mode
35c Yes 940-16i Tri-Mode
35d 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" AnyBay G4 (BH8B) Yes 940-16i Tri-Mode + 940-8i Tri-Mode
35e Yes 3x 940-8i Tri-Mode
39b 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
39e 6 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xAnyBay G5) (BS7Z) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
39g 6 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" (6xSAS/SATA 2xNVMe G5) (BS80) Yes OB SATA + OB NVMe
40a 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes OB NVMe
40c 0 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) + 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + Retimer G5
41a 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + Retimer G5
42a 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB SATA + OB NVMe
42c Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
42f Yes OB NVMe + 2x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
43a 8 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes OB SATA + OB NVMe
43c Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i
45a 16 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) Yes OB NVMe + 940-32i
45c Yes OB NVMe + 3x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
46a 16 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU) + 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes OB NVMe + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
46b Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i
46c Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i
46f Yes OB NVMe + 2x (440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i)
47a 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3x 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + 3x Retimer G5
48a 0 8 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BLL2) + 2x 8x2.5" NVMe G5 (BS7Y) Yes (no M.2 x4) OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 3x Retimer G5
49a 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 3x 8x2.5" SAS/SATA (B8LU); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3) Yes OB NVMe + 940-32i
49b Yes OB NVMe + 48-port Expander CFF + 940-16i CFF or 9350-16i CFF
49d Yes OB NVMe + 48-port Expander CFF + 440-16i
49f Yes OB NVMe + 440-16i or 540-16i or 940-16i + 48-port Expander CFF
49i Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i + 48-port Expander CFF
49l 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Front: 24x2.5" SAS/SATA with Expander (BQ2T); Rear: 4x2.5" AnyBay G5 (BSE3) Yes OB NVMe + 440-8i or 540-8i or 940-8i

Field upgrades

The SR655 V3 is orderable without drive bays, allowing you to add a backplane, cabling and controllers as field upgrades. The server also supports upgrading some configurations by adding additional front drive bays (for example, upgrading from 8 to 16x 2.5-inch drive bays).

For more information about the backplane kits and cable kits, see the Lenovo server options site:
https://serveroption.lenovo.com/cable_kit_options/

The upgrades are listed as follows:

  • 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch chassis drive bay upgrades
  • Upgrades to Retimer adapters
  • Upgrades to an Internal (CFF) HBA/RAID adapter

2.5-inch and 3.5-inch chassis drive bay upgrades

To add drive bays you will need to order both drive backplanes and cable kits. Backplane kits do not include cables.

In the case of 8x2.5" backplanes, there are cable kits for BP1, BP2 and BP3, which correspond to the backplanes as shown in the following figure. Select the cables related to the backplane location you wish to upgrade.

Backplane numbering
Figure 14. Backplane numbering

Table 30. Field upgrades
Drive bays Backplane and Cable Kit part numbers
Front 2.5-inch drive bays
4x2.5-inch Front AnyBay Gen4 drive bays
  • 4XH7A85893 , ThinkSystem SR665 V3/SR655 V3 4x2.5" AnyBay Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A87729, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Rear AnyBay Backplane Gen5 Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Front AnyBay Gen4 drive bays

Select BP1/BP2/BP3 cable kits based on location of the backplane to be installed
  • 4XH7A82913, ThinkSystem V3 2U 8x2.5" AnyBay Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86423, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP1 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86424, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP1 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86425, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP2 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86426, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP2 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86427, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP3 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86428, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP3 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Front AnyBay Gen5 drive bays

Select BP1/BP2/BP3 cable kits based on location of the backplane to be installed
  • 4XH7A86759, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 8x2.5" Gen5 AnyBay Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86423, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP1 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86424, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP1 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86425, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP2 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86426, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP2 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86427, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP3 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86428, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP3 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Front NVMe Gen4 drive bays

Select BP1/BP2/BP3 cable kits based on location of the backplane to be installed
  • 4XH7A61076, ThinkSystem V2/V3 2U 8x2.5" NVMe Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86423, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP1 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86425, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP2 NVMe Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86427, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP3 NVMe Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Front SAS/SATA drive bays

Select BP1/BP2/BP3 cable kits based on location of the backplane to be installed
  • 4XH7A60930, ThinkSystem V3 2U 8x2.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86424, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP1 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86426, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP2 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
  • 4X97A86428, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Front BP3 SAS/SATA Cable Kit
24x2.5-inch Front SAS/SATA drive bays with SAS Expander
  • 4XH7A86134, ThinkSystem SR665 V3/SR655 V3 24x2.5" Expander Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A87730, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 12x3.5" + 24x2.5" Expander Backplane Cable Option Kit
Front 3.5-inch drive bays
8x3.5-inch Front SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A60932, ThinkSystem V2/V3 2U 8x3.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86419, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Front Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
12x3.5-inch Front SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A60929, ThinkSystem V2/V3 2U 12x3.5" SAS/SATA Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86419, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Front Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
12x3.5-inch Front SAS/SATA/AnyBay Gen4 drive bays
  • 4XH7A87507, ThinkSystem V3 2U 8xSAS/SATA+4xAnyBay 3.5" Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86420, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Front Backplane AnyBay Cable Kit
12x3.5-inch Front SAS/SATA/NVMe Gen4 drive bays
  • 4XH7A87508, ThinkSystem V3 2U 8xSAS/SATA+4xNVMe 3.5" Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86420, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Front Backplane AnyBay Cable Kit
12x3.5-inch Front SAS/SATA drive bays with SAS Expander
  • 4XH7A86133, ThinkSystem SR665 V3/SR655 V3 12x3.5" Expander Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A87730, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 12x3.5" + 24x2.5" Expander Backplane Cable Option Kit
Mid 2.5-inch drive bays
8x2.5-inch Mid NVMe Gen4 drive bays
  • 4XH7A86756, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 8x2.5" NVMe Gen4 Middle Backplane Kit
  • 4X97A86432, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Middle Backplane NVMe Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Mid NVMe Gen5 drive bays
  • 4XH7A86757, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 8x2.5" NVMe Gen5 Middle Backplane Kit
  • 4X97A86432, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Middle Backplane NVMe Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Mid SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A86755, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 8x2.5" SAS/SATA Middle Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86431, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Middle Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
Mid 3.5-inch drive bays
4x3.5-inch Mid SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A86758, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 4x3.5" SAS/SATA Middle Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86422, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Middle Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
Rear 2.5-inch drive bays
4x2.5-inch Rear SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A60938, ThinkSystem V3 2U 4x2.5" SAS/SATA Rear Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86429, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Rear Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
8x2.5-inch Rear SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A60941, ThinkSystem V2/V3 2U 8x2.5" SAS/SATA Rear Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86429, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 2.5" Chassis Rear Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
Rear 3.5-inch drive bays
2x3.5-inch Rear SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A60940, ThinkSystem V2/V3 2U 2x3.5" SAS/SATA Rear Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86421, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Rear Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit
4x3.5-inch Rear SAS/SATA drive bays
  • 4XH7A60939, ThinkSystem V2/V3 2U Rear 4x3.5" SAS/SATA Rear Backplane Option Kit
  • 4X97A86421, ThinkSystem SR655 V3 3.5" Chassis Rear Backplane SAS/SATA Cable Kit

When adding drive bays, you will also need to add the appropriate storage controller(s). Consult the tables in the Storage configurations section to determine what controller sections are supported and what additional controllers you will need. Controllers are described in the Controllers for internal storage section.

Upgrades to Retimer adapters

If you are upgrading to a configuration that includes a Retimer adapter (see the Detailed tables in the Storage configurations section), then you will need to also order one of the following cable kits.

Table 31. Cable kits when upgrading to a Retimer configuration
Part number Description Quantity
required
4X97A86434 ThinkSystem SR655 V3 24 NVMe Cable Kit 1
4X97A86435 ThinkSystem SR655 V3 32 NVMe Cable Kit 1

Upgrades to an Internal (CFF) HBA/RAID adapter

If you want to add an internal (CFF) storage adapter (HBA, RAID adapter or SAS expander) to a configuration, you will need to order the cable kit as listed in the following table. Suitable upgrades are either replacing an existing adapter in a rear PCIe slot, or adding the CFF adapter to a server without any storage adapter installed.

The cable kit to order is listed in the following table.

Table 32. Cable kit when upgrading to an Internal HBA/RAID adapter
Part number Description Quantity
required
4X97A86433 ThinkSystem SR655 V3 Internal RAID Adapter Cable Kit 1

RAID flash power module (supercap) support

If you plan to add one of the RAID adapters that includes a RAID flash power module (supercap) as a field upgrade, then you may also need to order a Supercap installation kit for the supercap, depending on the location where the supercap will be installed. For CTO orders, the components needed are automatically derived when you select the RAID adapter.

The adapters that this applies to are as follows:

  • Any supported RAID 9350 adapter
  • Any supported RAID 940 adapter

The location of the supercaps depends on the mid-chassis drive cage used in the server, as shown in the following table.

Table 33. Supercap support
Mid drive cage Supercaps
supported		 Location of supercaps Supercap holder
No mid drive cage 4 Mounted on the air baffle Not needed
2.5-inch drives 2 Mounted on the left side of the mid drive cage Integrated into the left side of the 2.5-inch mid drive cage
3.5-inch drives 1 Mounted under the system fan cage Included with ThinkSystem SR655 V3 4x3.5" SAS/SATA Middle Backplane Option Kit, 4XH7A86758 (see below)

For 3.5-inch drive bay configurations, if the server already has 3.5-inch mid-chassis drive bays, then the supercap holder is already present under the system fan cages. If you plan to add 3.5-inch mid-chassis drive bays by adding ThinkSystem SR655 V3 4x3.5" SAS/SATA Middle Backplane Option Kit (4XH7A86758), then the supercap holder is part of the option kit.

7mm drives

The SR655 V3 supports two 7mm drives, either both SATA or both NVMe, at the rear of the server. These drives go in place of either PCIe slot 3 (Riser 1) or PCIe slot 6 (Riser 2) as shown in the following figure.

SR665 rear 7mm drive bay configurations
Figure 15. Rear 7mm drive bay configurations

For CTO orders, the configuration includes the drive bays and the cage the the drive bays are mounted on to.The cage required depends on where the 7mm drives are located (Riser 1 or Riser 2) and whether there are PCIe slots above the 7mm drive bays. The following table lists the ordering information.

Tip for 4x 3.5-inch rear drives: If you wish to configure 4x 3.5-inch rear drives plus 7mm drives in a CTO configuration, the 7mm drives will install in slot 6. You should specify riser card BLKP for Riser 1 and then leave Riser 2 without a riser selected.

Table 34. CTO feature codes for 7mm drives
Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Maximum
supported
Backplane - 7mm drives
BU0N ThinkSystem 7mm SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Rear Enablement Kit v2 Not TCE 1
B8P3 ThinkSystem 2U 7mm Drive Kit w/ NVMe RAID (Marvell RAID) Not TCE 1
BYFG ThinkSystem 7mm SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Rear Hot-Swap RAID Enablement Kit (Broadcom RAID) Not TCE 1
Hardware RAID support for ThinkSystem 7mm SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Rear Enablement Kit v2 (BU0N)
BT7N ThinkSystem RAID 5350-8i for M.2/7mm SATA Boot Enablement Not TCE 1
BT7P ThinkSystem RAID 540-8i for M.2/7mm NVMe Boot Enablement Not TCE 1

The use of the 7mm rear drive bays has the following configuration rules:

  • The 7mm rear drive kit is supported in either slot 3 or slot 6 but not both at the same time.
  • M.2 RAID and 7mm RAID are mutually exclusive: they are not supported together in the same configuration
  • For ThinkSystem 7mm SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Rear Enablement Kit v2 (feature BU0N):
    • The 7mm drive bays support either SATA drives or NVMe drives but not both. You specify SATA or NVMe in the configurator using feature codes BTTV (SATA) or BTTW (NVMe).
    • If RAID support is not required, the 7mm drives connect to an onboard port; No additional adapter is required
    • If RAID support is required, select feature code BS7A in the configurator to enable RAID
    • The support of RAID-1 with the 7mm drives requires an additional RAID adapter that is installed in PCIe slot 3:
      • RAID support for 7mm SATA drives requires a RAID 5350-8i adapter (feature BT7N)
      • RAID support for 7mm NVMe drives requires a RAID 540-8i adapter operating in Tri-Mode (feature BT7P)
    • The RAID adapter used for 7mm drive support cannot be configured for use with other drive bays (not even with M.2)
  • For ThinkSystem 2U 7mm Drive Kit w/ NVMe RAID (feature B8P3)
    • The adapter only supports NVMe drives
    • RAID functionality is integrated into the 7mm adapter using a Marvell 88NR2241 NVMe RAID Controller
  • For ThinkSystem 7mm SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Rear Hot-Swap RAID Enablement Kit (feature BYFG)
    • The adapter supports either SATA or NVMe drives
    • RAID functionality is integrated into the 7mm adapter using a Broadcom RAID Controller

7mm drive field upgrades

For field upgrades, using the following ordering information. The kits include two cages for use depending on your PCIe slot configuration. The cages are for either Riser 1 or Riser 2. The part numbers also include the cables necessary to connect the 7mm backplane to either the system board or RAID adapter.

Table 35. Field upgrade part numbers for 7mm drives
Part number Description Purpose
7mm Enablement Kits
4XH7A87560

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 7mm SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Non-RAID Enablement Kit

  • 2-bay hot-swap drive enclosure
  • 2FH+7mm SSD Riser Cage (with 2 FH PCIe slots)
  • 7mm SSD Riser Cage (without PCIe slots)
  • 2x 7mm drive bay fillers
  • Signal and power cables for onboard connections
 7mm drive bays for SATA or NVMe drive support with no RAID support (does not include cables needed for RAID support with a separate adapter)
4XH7A87561

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 7mm SATA/NVME 2-Bay RAID Enablement Kit

  • 2-bay SATA hot-swap drive enclosure
  • 2FH+7mm SSD Riser Cage (with 2 FH PCIe slots)
  • 7mm SSD Riser Cage (without PCIe slots)
  • 2x 7mm drive bay fillers
  • Signal and power cables for RAID adapter connectivity
 7mm drive bays for SATA or NVMe drives, plus cables for use with a RAID adapter. Requires a separate RAID adapter for RAID support.
4X97A88531

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 7mm NVMe 2-Bay RAID Enablement Kit

  • 2-bay hot-swap drive enclosure
  • 2FH+7mm SSD Riser Cage (with 2 FH PCIe slots)
  • 7mm SSD Riser Cage (without PCIe slots)
  • 2x 7mm drive bay fillers
  • Signal and power cables for onboard connections
 7mm drive bays for NVMe drive support. RAID support is integrated into the adapter using an onboard Marvell 88NR2241 NVMe RAID controller.
4XH7A93167

ThinkSystem SR665 V3/SR655 V3 7mm RAID B540p-2HS SATA/NVMe Enablement Kit

  • 2-bay hot-swap drive enclosure
  • 2FH+7mm SSD Riser Cage (with 2 FH PCIe slots)
  • 7mm SSD Riser Cage (without PCIe slots)
  • 2x 7mm drive bay fillers
  • Signal and power cables for onboard connections
 7mm drive bays for SATA or NVMe drive support. RAID support is integrated into the adapter using an onboard Broadcom RAID controller.
RAID adapters for optional 7mm HW RAID support (for use with 4XH7A87561)
4Y37A72482 ThinkSystem RAID 5350-8i PCIe 12Gb Adapter RAID adapter needed for SATA RAID-1 with 2x 7mm SATA drives
4Y37A78834 ThinkSystem RAID 540-8i PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter

RAID adapter needed for NVMe RAID-1 with 2x 7mm NVMe drives

Tip: Once the 540-8i adapter is installed, it will need to be configured to operate in Tri-mode to enable NVMe RAID.

M.2 drives

The SR655 V3 supports one or two M.2 form-factor SATA or NVMe drives for use as an operating system boot solution or as additional storage.

The M.2 drives install into an M.2 module which is mounted horizontally in the server:

  • In servers without mid-chassis drives, the M.2 module is mounted on the air baffle
  • With a mid-chassis drive cage (2.5-inch or 3.5-inch), the M.2 module is mounted on the drive cage, as shown in the Mid drive bays section.

The supported M.2 modules are listed in the following table. For field upgrades see the M.2 field upgrades section below.

Table 36. M.2 modules
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SATA
drives		 NVMe
drives		 RAID Maximum
supported		 Windows 10/11
support
4Y37A09738 B5XJ ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Enablement Kit Not TCE Yes Yes (x1 lane) No 1 Supported
4Y37A79663 BM8X ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/x4 NVMe 2-Bay Adapter TCE Yes Yes (x4 lanes) Optional 1 Supported
4Y37A09750 B8P9 ThinkSystem M.2 NVMe 2-Bay RAID Adapter TCE No Yes (x1 lane) Integrated (Marvell) 1 No
4Y37A90063 BYFF ThinkSystem M.2 RAID B540i-2i SATA/NVMe Adapter Not TCE Yes Yes (x1 lane) Integrated (Broadcom) 1 Supported

ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/x4 NVMe 2-Bay Adapter (4Y37A79663, BM8X) optionally supports RAID with the addition of a separate RAID adapter is required. For CTO orders, ordering information is listed in the following table to derive the required RAID adapter.

Table 37. CTO feature codes to select M.2 RAID (ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/x4 NVMe 2-Bay Adapter, BM8X, only)
Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 RAID
support		 Maximum
supported
BT7N ThinkSystem RAID 5350-8i for M.2/7mm SATA Boot Enablement Not TCE SATA 1
BT7P ThinkSystem RAID 540-8i for M.2/7mm NVMe Boot Enablement Not TCE NVMe 1

Configuration notes:

  • M.2 is not supported with all storage configurations - see Storage configurations for details.
  • M.2 RAID and 7mm RAID are mutually exclusive: they are not supported together in the same configuration
  • For field upgrades, an additional cable is needed as described in the M.2 field upgrades section below
  • For ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Enablement Kit (4Y37A09738):
    • RAID is not supported
    • The installation of at least one M.2 drive is required. In the configurator, at least one M.2 drive must be selected
  • For ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/x4 NVMe 2-Bay Adapter (4Y37A79663):
    • The support of RAID-1 with the M.2 drives requires an additional RAID adapter that is installed in PCIe slot 3:
      • RAID support for M.2 SATA drives requires a RAID 5350-8i adapter (feature BT7N)
      • RAID support for M.2 NVMe drives requires a RAID 540-8i adapter operating in Tri-Mode (feature BT7P)
    • The RAID adapter used for M.2 drive support cannot be configured for use with other drive bays (not even with 7mm)
    • If RAID support is not required, the M.2 adapter connects to an onboard port. No additional adapter is required
  • For ThinkSystem M.2 NVMe 2-Bay RAID Adapter (4Y37A09750):
    • RAID is implemented using an onboard Marvell 88NR2241 NVMe RAID controller
  • For ThinkSystem M.2 RAID B540i-2i SATA/NVMe Adapter (4Y37A90063):
    • RAID is implemented using an onboard Broadcom RAID controller

Supported drives are listed in the Internal drive options section.

The ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Enablement Kit has the following features:

  • Supports one or two M.2 drives, either SATA or NVMe
  • When two drives installed, they must be either both SATA or both NVMe
  • Support 42mm, 60mm, 80mm and 110mm drive form factors (2242, 2260, 2280 and 22110)
  • On the SR655 V3, no RAID support
  • No onboard RAID; RAID functionality is provided by a separate adapter (SATA or NVMe)
  • Either 6Gbps SATA or PCIe 3.0 x1 interface to the drives depending on the drives installed
  • Supports monitoring and reporting of events and temperature through I2C
  • Firmware update via Lenovo firmware update tools
  • When connected to a separate PCIe RAID adapter, supports SED drive encryption via the RAID adapter, otherwise no SED support

The ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/x4 NVMe 2-Bay Adapter has the following features:

  • Supports one or two M.2 drives, either SATA or NVMe
  • When two drives installed, they must be either both SATA or both NVMe
  • Support 42mm, 60mm, 80mm and 110mm drive form factors (2242, 2260, 2280 and 22110)
  • No onboard RAID; RAID functionality is provided by a separate adapter (SATA or NVMe)
  • Either 6Gbps SATA or PCIe 4.0 x4 interface to the drives depending on the drives installed
  • Supports monitoring and reporting of events and temperature through I2C
  • Firmware update via Lenovo firmware update tools
  • When connected to a separate PCIe RAID adapter, supports SED drive encryption via the RAID adapter, otherwise no SED support

The ThinkSystem M.2 NVMe 2-Bay RAID Adapter (4Y37A09750) has the following features:

  • Supports one or two NVMe M.2 drives
  • Support 42mm, 60mm, 80mm and 110mm drive form factors (2242, 2260, 2280 and 22110)
  • RAID support via an onboard Marvell 88NR2241 NVMe RAID Controller
  • With 1 drive, supports single-drive RAID-0
  • With 2 drives, supports 2-drive RAID-0, 2-drive RAID-1, or two single-drive RAID-0 arrays
  • PCIe 3.0 x2 host interface; PCIe 3.0 x1 connection to each drive
  • Management and configuration support via UEFI and OS-based tools
  • Supports monitoring and reporting of events and temperature through I2C
  • Firmware update via Lenovo firmware update tools
  • No support for SED drive encryption

The ThinkSystem M.2 RAID B540i-2i SATA/NVMe Adapter (4Y37A90063) has the following features:

  • Supports one or two M.2 drives, either SATA or NVMe
  • Support 42mm, 60mm, 80mm and 110mm drive form factors (2242, 2260, 2280 and 22110)
  • RAID support via an onboard Broadcom SAS3808N RAID Controller
  • With 1 drive, supports JBOD
  • With 2 drives, supports 2-drive RAID-0, 2-drive RAID-1, or JBOD
  • PCIe 4.0 x2 host interface; PCIe 4.0 x1 connection to each drive
  • Management and configuration support via UEFI and OS-based tools
  • Supports monitoring and reporting of events and temperature
  • Firmware update via Lenovo firmware update tools
  • Supports SED drive encryption

M.2 field upgrades

For field upgrades, the SR655 V3 also requires additional cables necessary to connect the M.2 to either the system board or RAID adapter. Ordering information is listed in the following table.

Table 38. Cable kit for M.2 drive support
Part number Description Purpose
M.2 Cable Kit - cables for use with RAID adapters or with onboard (non-RAID) connectivity
4X97A87726 ThinkSystem SR655 V3 M.2 x4 SATA/NVMe Cable Kit Cable kit for ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/x4 NVMe 2-Bay Adapter (4Y37A79663)
4X97A87559 ThinkSystem SR655 V3 M.2 SATA/NVMe Cable Kit Cable kit for ThinkSystem M.2 SATA/NVMe 2-Bay Enablement Kit (4Y37A09738) or ThinkSystem M.2 NVMe 2-Bay RAID Adapter (4Y37A09750)
4X97A93808 ThinkSystem SR650 V3/SR655 V3 M.2 RAID B540i-2i SATA/NVMe Cable Kit Cable kit for ThinkSystem M.2 RAID B540i-2i SATA/NVMe Adapter (4Y37A90063)
RAID adapters for M.2 RAID support (4Y37A79663 only)
4Y37A72482 ThinkSystem RAID 5350-8i PCIe 12Gb Adapter (SATA M.2 support) RAID adapter to provide M.2 SATA RAID support
4Y37A78834 ThinkSystem RAID 540-8i PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter (NVMe M.2 support using Tri-Mode)

RAID adapter to provide M.2 NVMe support using Tri-Mode

Tip: Once the 540-8i adapter is installed, it will need to be configured to operate in Tri-mode to enable NVMe RAID.

SED encryption key management with SKLM

The server supports self-encrypting drives (SEDs) as listed in the Internal drive options section. To effectively manage a large deployment of these drives in Lenovo servers, IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager (SKLM) offers a centralized key management solution.

The IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager software is available from Lenovo using the ordering information listed in the following table.

Table 39. IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager licenses
Part number Feature Description
SKLM Basic Edition
7S0A007FWW S874 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager Basic Edition Install License + SW Subscription & Support 12 Months
7S0A008VWW SDJR IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager Basic Edition Install License + SW Subscription & 3 Years Of Support
7S0A008WWW SDJS IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager Basic Edition Install License + SW Subscription & 4 Years Of Support
7S0A008XWW SDJT IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager Basic Edition Install License + SW Subscription & 5 Years Of Support
SKLM For Raw Decimal Terabyte Storage
7S0A007HWW S876 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & Support 12 Months
7S0A008YWW SDJU IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 3 Years Of Support
7S0A008ZWW SDJV IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 4 Years Of Support
7S0A0090WW SDJW IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 5 Years Of Support
SKLM For Raw Decimal Petabyte Storage
7S0A007KWW S878 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & Support 12 Months
7S0A0091WW SDJX IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 3 Years Of Support
7S0A0092WW SDJY IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 4 Years Of Support
7S0A0093WW SDJZ IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Raw Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 5 Years Of Support
SKLM For Usable Decimal Terabyte Storage
7S0A007MWW S87A IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & Support 12 Months
7S0A0094WW SDK0 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 3 Years In Support
7S0A0095WW SDK1 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 4 Years In Support
7S0A0096WW SDK2 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Terabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 5 Years In Support
SKLM For Usable Decimal Petabyte Storage
7S0A007PWW S87C IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & Support 12 Months
7S0A0097WW SDK3 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 3 Years Of Support
7S0A0098WW SDK4 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 4 Years Of Support
7S0A0099WW SDK5 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager For Usable Decimal Petabyte Storage Resource Value Unit License + SW Subscription & 5 Years Of Support

Encryption Enablement

For CTO orders, the configurator allows you to specify that you want to create an "encryption-ready" server, and to ensure that only components that support encryption are selectable in the configurator. This is done in DCSC and x-config configurator tools by selecting the feature code listed in the following table.

Table 40. Encryption Enablement
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
CTO only CES1* Drive Encryption Enablement (not supported with vSAN) TCE

* In DCSC, this feature is in Storage > Internal Storage under the heading "Encryption Enablement"

Tip: This feature will not be selectable until an SED-capable drive is selected.

By selecting this feature code, the following requirements will be enabled in the configurator:

  • SED drives will be required
  • XCC2 Platinum will be required
  • The ThinkSystem M.2 NVMe 2-Bay RAID Adapter (B8P9) cannot be selected
  • 440-8i and 440-16i HBAs cannot be selected

Configuration notes:

  • Do not use this feature code for VMware vSAN or Nutanix servers, since these virtualization offerings do not support HW RAID adapter-based encryption
  • Selecting this feature code does not enable encryption at the factory
  • If you don't select this feature code, you will still be able to enable encryption in your server, however you will need to ensure that you have suitable storage controllers and drives installed in the server

Controllers for internal storage

The SR655 V3 offers a variety of controller options for internal drives:

  • For 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drives:
    • Onboard SATA ports (feature AVUX)
    • Onboard NVMe ports (feature BC4V)
    • NVMe switch and retimer adapters (PCIe slot-based)
    • RAID adapters and HBAs for SAS/SATA drives (PCIe slot-based)
    • RAID adapters, SAS Expander, and HBAs for SAS/SATA drives (cabled in a dedicated space)
  • For 7mm drive bays in the rear of the server (see the 7mm drives section)
    • SATA controller integrated into the 7mm drive bay enclosure
    • NVMe controller integrated into the 7mm drive bay enclosure
  • For M.2 drives internal to the server (see M.2 drives section)
    • SATA controller integrated on the M.2 SATA 2-Bay RAID Enablement Kit
    • NVMe controller integrated on the M.2 NVMe 2-Bay RAID Enablement Kit

As well as supporting RAID adapters and HBAs that install in a PCIe slot, the SR655 V3 with 2.5-inch front drive bays supports a custom form factor (CFF) adapter that is mounted in the server and cabled to one of the onboard NVMe ports. These Internal Adapters are not supported with 3.5-inch front drives due to a lack of physical space.

The following table lists the adapters used for the internal storage of the server. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

Table 41. Internal Storage adapter support
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 RAID levels Supercap PCIe
lanes		 Max
qty		 Slots
supported		 Windows 10/11
support
Onboard controllers
CTO only AVUX On Board SATA AHCI Mode TCE None No - 1 N/A Supported
CTO only BC4V Non RAID NVMe TCE None No - 1 N/A Supported
12Gb SAS/6Gb SATA HBA - Adaptec PCIe Gen 3
4Y37A72480 BJHH ThinkSystem 4350-8i SAS/SATA 12Gb HBA Not TCE None No Gen3 x8 4 1 - 6 No
4Y37A72481 BJHJ ThinkSystem 4350-16i SAS/SATA 12Gb HBA Not TCE None No Gen3 x8 2 1 - 6 No
24Gb SAS/6Gb SATA HBA - Adaptec PCIe Gen 4
4Y37A97938 C6UL ThinkSystem 4450-16i SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 24Gb HBA Not TCE None No Gen4 x8 4 1 - 6 Supported
12Gb SAS/6Gb SATA HBA - Broadcom PCIe Gen 4
4Y37A78601 BM51 ThinkSystem 440-8i SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 12Gb HBA TCE None No Gen4 x8 4 1 - 6 No
4Y37A78602 BM50 ThinkSystem 440-16i SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 12Gb HBA TCE None No Gen4 x8 2 1 - 6 No
4Y37A09725 B8P1 ThinkSystem 440-16i SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 12Gb Internal HBA Not TCE None No Gen4 x8 1 Cabled No
12Gb SAS/6Gb SATA RAID adapters - Adaptec PCIe Gen 3
4Y37A72482 BJHK ThinkSystem RAID 5350-8i PCIe 12Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5 No Gen3 x8 4 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A84028 BRQV ThinkSystem RAID 5350-8i PCIe 12Gb Internal Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5 No Gen3 x8 1 Cabled Supported
4Y37A72483 BJHL ThinkSystem RAID 9350-8i 2GB Flash PCIe 12Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen3 x8 4 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A72484 BJHM ThinkSystem RAID 9350-8i 2GB Flash PCIe 12Gb Internal Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen3 x8 1 Cabled Supported
4Y37A72485 BJHN ThinkSystem RAID 9350-16i 4GB Flash PCIe 12Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen3 x8 2 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A72486 BJHP ThinkSystem RAID 9350-16i 4GB Flash PCIe 12Gb Internal Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen3 x8 1 Cabled Supported
24Gb SAS/6Gb SATA RAID adapters - Adaptec PCIe Gen 4
4Y37A97936 C6UJ ThinkSystem RAID 5450-16i PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple No Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A97935 C6UH ThinkSystem RAID 9450-8i 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A97937 C6UK ThinkSystem RAID 9450-16i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
12Gb SAS/6Gb SATA RAID adapters - Broadcom PCIe Gen 4 (RAID 940 adapters support Tri-Mode)
4Y37A78834 BMFT ThinkSystem RAID 540-8i PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter TCE 0, 1, 10 No Gen4 x8 4 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A78835 BNAX ThinkSystem RAID 540-16i PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10 No Gen4 x8 2 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A09728 B8NY ThinkSystem RAID 940-8i 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 4 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A09729 B8NW ThinkSystem RAID 940-8i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 3 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A78600 BM35 ThinkSystem RAID 940-16i 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 2 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A09730 B8NZ ThinkSystem RAID 940-16i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 2 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A09735 B8P0 ThinkSystem RAID 940-16i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Internal Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 1 Cabled Supported
4Y37A09733 B8P8 ThinkSystem RAID 940-32i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
12Gb SAS/6Gb SATA expanders
4Y37A09736 B8P6 ThinkSystem 48 port 12Gb Internal Expander Not TCE None No Gen4 x8 1 Cabled Supported
NVMe using Tri-Mode (NVMe x1) (deprecated - use SAS/SATA adapters B8NY, B8NW, BM35, B8NZ, or B8P0 combined with CH5Z; see Tri-Mode section)
4Y37A09728 BGM1 ThinkSystem RAID 940-8i 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter for U.3 Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 3 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A09729 BGM0 ThinkSystem RAID 940-8i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter for U.3 Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 3 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A78600 BM36 ThinkSystem RAID 940-16i 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter for U.3 Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A09730 BDY4 ThinkSystem RAID 940-16i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter for U.3 Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60 Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A97935 CBMY ThinkSystem RAID 9450-8i 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter for U.3 Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A97937 CBMZ ThinkSystem RAID 9450-16i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter for U.3 Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen4 x8 1 1 - 6 Supported
4Y37A97940 CBN0 ThinkSystem RAID 9450-32i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter (x1 SAS/SATA/NVMe U.3 only) Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen4 x16 1 1 - 6 Supported
NVMe using x4 interface
4Y37A97940 C6UN ThinkSystem RAID 9450-32i 8GB Flash PCIe Gen4 24Gb Adapter (8 drives) Not TCE 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6, 60, 1 Triple, 10 Triple Included Gen4 x16 1 1 - 6 Supported
4TA7A84579 BLKY ThinkSystem PCIe Gen5 NVMe Retimer Adapter (4 drives) TCE None No Gen5 x16 3 1,2,4 No
4C57A65446 B98C ThinkSystem 4-Port PCIe Gen4 NVMe Retimer Adapter (4 drives) TCE None No Gen4 x16 3 1,3,2,4 No
4Y37A09737 B8P5 ThinkSystem 1611-8P PCIe Gen4 Switch Adapter (8 drives) Not TCE None No Gen4 x16 2 4,5 Supported

‡ These custom form factor (CFF) adapters are only supported with 2.5-inch front drive bays. Not supported in configurations with 3.5-inch front drive bays.

Configuration notes:

  • Gen5 Retimer adapter: CD8P drives are supported with ThinkSystem PCIe Gen5 NVMe Retimer Adapter (4TA7A84579). See Support Tip TT3437 for details regarding the minimum firmware levels that are required.
  • Supercap support limits the number of RAID adapters installable: The table lists whether the adapter includes a power module (supercap) to power the flash memory. The server supports between 1 and 4 supercaps depending on the server configuration as described in the RAID flash power module (supercap) support section. The number of supercaps supported also determines the maximum number of RAID adapters with flash that can be installed in the server.
  • Field upgrades: If you are adding a RAID adapter with supercap to the server as a field upgrade, you may need a supercap holder as described in the RAID flash power module (supercap) support section.
  • 7mm drive support: The storage adapters listed in the table below do not provide connectivity to the 7mm drive bays. The 7mm drives have their own independent RAID controller. See the 7mm drives section for details.

  • E810 Ethernet and X350 RAID/HBAs: The use of both an Intel E810 network adapter and an X350 HBA/RAID adapter (9350, 5350 and 4350) is supported, however E810 firmware CVL4.3 or later is required. For details, see Support Tip HT513226.

The following rules apply to the X450 (4450, 5450 and 9450) HBA and RAID adapters:

  • The X450 adapters support 24Gb SAS, however 24Gb backplanes and 24Gb SAS drives are required
    • See the backplanes table in the Internal storage section to see which backplanes support 24Gb SAS
    • If a 12Gb backplane is used, then the X450 adapters will only operate at up to 12Gb SAS
    • 12Gb SAS drives will operate at up to 12Gb
    • SATA drives will operate at up to 6Gb
  • The 4450 and 5450 adapters only support SAS/SATA drives; NVMe drives are not supported
  • All 9450 adapters support Tri-Mode, with support for SAS, SATA, and NVMe U.3 drives. Tri-Mode connects to NVMe drives using a x1 connection.

  • The 9450-32i adapter also supports NVMe x4 mode, with support for NVMe drives that connect using a x4 connection.

  • For specific adapter/backplane support in the SR655 V3, see the Storage configurations section.
  • 9450-8i NVMe support:
    • U.3 NVMe drives, with a x1 interface per drive, up to 8 drives (Tri-Mode)
    • No support for U.2 drives
  • 9450-16i NVMe support:
    • U.3 NVMe drives, with a x1 interface per drive, up to 16 drives (Tri-Mode)
    • No support for U.2 drives

  • 9450-32i NVMe support:
    • U.3 NVMe drives, with a x1 interface per drive, up to 32 drives (Tri-Mode)
    • U.2 NVMe drives, with a x4 interface per drive, up to 8 drives
    • U.3 NVMe drives, with a x4 interface per drive, up to 8 drives
  • Based on how the 9450-32i adapter is cabled to the backplane, the adapter will support either SAS/SATA/U.3 NVMe (Tri-Mode) with a x1 connection or it will support U.2 and U.3 NVMe with a PCIe x4 connection.

  • Only the following NVMe drive families are supported with the 9450 adapters:
    • PM1733a Read Intensive family except 1.92TB and 30.72TB drive
    • PM1743 Read Intensive family
    • PM9A3 Read Intensive family except 15.36TB
    • PS1010 Read Intensive family
    • 6500 ION Read Intensive family
    • P5800X Write Intensive family
    • 7500 PRO Read Intensive family

The onboard SATA controller has the following features:

  • Controller integrated into the AMD processor
  • JBOD only; no RAID support
  • Supports up to 16 SATA drives in the SR655 V3
  • Supports HDDs and SSDs; can be mixed

The onboard NVMe support has the following features:

  • Controller integrated into the AMD processor
  • Supports up to 12 NVMe drives direct connected to onboard ports; additional drives through retimer/switch adapters
  • Each drive has PCIe 5.0 x4 host interface
  • Supports JBOD
  • No support for RAID

For specifications about the RAID adapters and HBAs supported by the SR655 V3, see the ThinkSystem RAID Adapter and HBA Reference, available from:
https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1288-thinksystem-raid-adapter-and-hba-reference#sr655-v3-support=SR655%2520V3

For more information about each of the adapters, see the product guides in the RAID adapters or HBA sections of the Lenovo Press web site:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/raid
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/hba

Tri-Mode support - RAID 940 and RAID 9450 adapters

The RAID 940 and RAID 9450 adapters support NVMe through a feature named Tri-Mode support (or Trimode support). This feature enables the use of NVMe U.3 drives at the same time as SAS and SATA drives. Tri-Mode requires an AnyBay backplane. Cabling of the controller to the backplanes is the same as with SAS/SATA drives, and the NVMe drives are connected via a PCIe x1 link to the controller.

NVMe drives connected using Tri-Mode support provide better performance than SAS or SATA drives: A SATA SSD has a data rate of 6Gbps, a SAS SSD has a data rate of 12Gbps, whereas an NVMe U.3 Gen 4 SSD with a PCIe x1 link will have a data rate of 16Gbps. NVMe drives typically also have lower latency and higher IOPS compared to SAS and SATA drives. Tri-Mode is supported with U.3 NVMe drives and requires an AnyBay backplane.

Tri-Mode requires U.3 drives: Only NVMe drives with a U.3 interface are supported. U.2 drives are not supported. See the Internal drive options section for the U.3 drives supported by the server.

NVMe x4 support (not Tri-Mode): As an alternative to Tri-Mode support, the RAID 9450-32i adapter supports connectivity to either NVMe U.2 and U.3 drives using a PCIe Gen4 x4 connection. A x4 connection to each drive enables maximum performance from the NVMe drives. Note that a x4 connection requires different cabling than a Tri-Mode connection. Only NVMe drives are supported; SAS and SATA drives are not supported.

New as of July 2026: To enable Tri-Mode in CTO orders of the SR655 V3, use the following feature code:

Table 42. Tri-Mode Enablement
Feature code Description
CH5Z Tri-Mode Enablement

The process to configure Tri-Mode for a CTO order in DCSC is as follows:

  1. In the Storage tab, select one of the 940-8i or 940-16i controllers from the SAS/SATA RAID Controller group
  2. In the Internal Storage tab, select select Tri-Mode Enablement (feature CH5Z)
  3. You can then select either NVMe or SATA or SATA drives or any combination of these drives, up to the number supported by the server and the backplanes selected.

Tips:

  • Feature CH5Z is not selectable until one of the 940-8i or 940-16i adapters in SAS/SATA RAID Controller group is selected.
  • Feature CH5Z is not selectable if Non RAID NVMe (BC4V) is selected.
  • The existing Tri-Mode "for U.3" adapter feature codes (features BGM1, BGM0, BM36, BDY4) in the Tri-Mode Controller group are for existing orders only and are being phased out (deprecated)

Internal drive options

The following tables list the drive options for internal storage of the server.

2.5-inch hot-swap drives:

  • 2.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS HDDs
  • 2.5-inch hot-swap 24 Gb SAS SSDs
  • 2.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS SSDs
  • 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA SSDs
  • 2.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 5.0 NVMe SSDs
  • 2.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSDs

2.5-inch 7mm hot-swap drives:

  • 7mm 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA SSDs
  • 7mm 2.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSDs

3.5-inch hot-swap drives:

  • 3.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS HDDs
  • 3.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA HDDs
  • 3.5-inch hot-swap 24 Gb SAS SSDs
  • 3.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS SSDs
  • 3.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA SSDs
  • 3.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 5.0 NVMe SSDs
  • 3.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSDs

M.2 drives (for M.2 adapters except B350/B550):

  • M.2 SATA non-hot-swap drives
  • M.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe non-hot-swap drives

M.2 drive support: The use of M.2 drives requires an additional adapter as described in the M.2 drives subsection.

SED support: The tables include a column to indicate which drives support SED encryption. The encryption functionality can be disabled if needed. Note: Not all SED-enabled drives have "SED" in the description.

Table 43. 2.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS HDDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 12 Gb SAS 15K
7XB7A00021 AULV ThinkSystem 2.5" 300GB 15K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 40
7XB7A00022 AULW ThinkSystem 2.5" 600GB 15K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 40
7XB7A00023 AULX ThinkSystem 2.5" 900GB 15K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 40
2.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 12 Gb SAS 10K
7XB7A00025 AULZ ThinkSystem 2.5" 600GB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 40
7XB7A00027 AUM1 ThinkSystem 2.5" 1.2TB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD TCE No 40
7XB7A00028 AUM2 ThinkSystem 2.5" 1.8TB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A83970 BRG7 ThinkSystem 2.5" 2.4TB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE No 40
2.5-inch hot-swap SED HDDs - 12 Gb SAS 10K
7XB7A00031 AUM5 ThinkSystem 2.5" 600GB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD SED Not TCE Support 40
7XB7A00033 B0YX ThinkSystem 2.5" 1.2TB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7A84038 BRG8 ThinkSystem 2.5" 2.4TB 10K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD FIPS v2 TCE Support 40
Table 44. 2.5-inch hot-swap 24 Gb SAS SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 24 Gb SAS - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7B07612 CABL ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 800GB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07613 CABR ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 1.6TB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07614 CABQ ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 3.2TB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07615 CABK ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 6.4TB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 24 Gb SAS - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B07600 CABS ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 960GB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07601 CABV ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 1.92TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07602 CABT ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 3.84TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07603 CABY ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 7.68TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07604 CABX ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 15.36TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
4XB7B07605 CABW ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 30.72TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 40
Table 45. 2.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 12 Gb SAS - Write Intensive (10+ DWPD)
4XB7A83214 BR10 ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3750 400GB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A83215 BR0Z ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3750 800GB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A83216 BR0Y ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3750 1.6TB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A83217 BR0X ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3750 3.2TB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A70006 BG07 ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3732 400GB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A70005 BG06 ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3732 800GB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A70004 BG05 ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3732 1.6TB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A70003 BG04 ThinkSystem 2.5" Nytro 3732 3.2TB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 40
Table 46. 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7B09972 CBV9 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 480GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7B09973 CBV8 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 960GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7B09974 CBV7 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 1.92TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 40
4XB7B09975 CBV6 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 3.84TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7A90884 BYM2 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 480GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A90885 BYM4 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 960GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A90886 BYM5 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 1.92TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 Not TCE No 40
4XB7A90887 BYM6 ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 3.84TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A82289 BQ21 ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 MAX 480GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82290 BQ24 ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 MAX 960GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82291 BQ22 ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 MAX 1.92TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82292 BQ23 ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 MAX 3.84TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B09967 CBVE ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7B09968 CBVD ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7B09969 CBVC ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 1.92TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7B09970 CBVB ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 3.84TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7B09971 CBVA ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 7.68TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED TCE Support 40
4XB7A90868 C2BM ThinkSystem 2.5" ER3 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A90872 BYLQ ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 Not TCE No 40
4XB7A90873 BYLR ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A90874 BYLS ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A90875 BYLT ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 1.92TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A90876 BYLU ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 3.84TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A90877 BYLV ThinkSystem 2.5" VA 7.68TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 40
4XB7A82258 BQ1Q ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 PRO 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82259 BQ1P ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 PRO 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82260 BQ1R ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 PRO 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82261 BQ1X ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 PRO 1.92TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82262 BQ1S ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 PRO 3.84TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A82263 BQ1T ThinkSystem 2.5" 5400 PRO 7.68TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 40
4XB7A72438 BM8B ThinkSystem 2.5" PM893 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A72439 BM8A ThinkSystem 2.5" PM893 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A72440 BM89 ThinkSystem 2.5" PM893 1.92TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A72441 BM88 ThinkSystem 2.5" PM893 3.84TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A72442 BM87 ThinkSystem 2.5" PM893 7.68TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 40
4XB7A17072 B99D ThinkSystem 2.5" S4520 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 40
Table 47. 2.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 5.0 NVMe SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
2.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 5.0 NVMe - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7A93097 C1WM ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 PM9D5a 800GB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93127 C0ZR ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93128 C0ZQ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93129 C0ZP ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93130 C0ZN ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 12.8TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
2.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 5.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B14460 CGP5 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 CD9P 61.44TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B10396 CFD6 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 SN861 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B10397 CFD5 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 SN861 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B10398 CFD4 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 SN861 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B10399 CFD3 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 SN861 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B08330 CBSW ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 6550 30.72TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B08331 CBSX ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 6550 61.44TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B02475 C8DH ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 BM1743 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B02406 C8DK ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 BM1743 30.72TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B02407 C8DJ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 BM1743 61.44TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B09031 CBSY ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 BM1743 122.88TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93066 C0GK ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 PM9D3a 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7B04552 CA3Q ThinkSystem 2.5" PM9D3a 30.72TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93122 C0ZV ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93123 C0ZU ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93124 C0ZT ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93125 C0ZS ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93126 C1W7 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 30.72TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
2.5-inch SSDs - U.3 PCIe 5.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7A82366 BTPZ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 PM1743 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A82367 BTQ0 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 PM1743 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A82368 BTQ1 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 PM1743 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A82369 BTQ2 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 PM1743 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
Table 48. 2.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
2.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Write Intensive (10+ DWPD)
4XB7A17158 BKKY ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5800X 400GB Write Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE No 32
4XB7A17159 BKKZ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5800X 800GB Write Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE No 32
4XB7A17160 BMM8 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5800X 1.6TB Write Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE No 32
2.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7A93896 C18J ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93897 C18H ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93898 C18G ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93899 C18F ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 12.8TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A17129 BNEG ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5620 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A17130 BNEH ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5620 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A17133 BNEZ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5620 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A17136 BA4V ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5620 12.8TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
2.5-inch SSDs - U.3 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7A95054 C2BG ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 MAX 800GB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95055 C2BV ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 MAX 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95056 C2BW ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 MAX 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95057 C2BF ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 MAX 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95058 C2BX ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 MAX 12.8TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A79639 BNF1 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 MAX 800GB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13967 BNEJ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 MAX 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13970 BNEY ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 MAX 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13971 BNEL ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 MAX 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A84056 BRG0 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 MAX 12.8TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
2.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7A95047 C2BL ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5336 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95048 C2BK ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5336 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93075 C1WJ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5336 30.72TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93076 C1WK ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5336 61.44TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93892 C18N ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93893 C18M ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD TCE Support 32
4XB7A93894 C18L ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A93895 C18K ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 VA 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A90099 BXMB ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 PM9A3 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13941 BMGD ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5520 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13942 BMGE ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5520 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13943 BNEF ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5520 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A13631 BNEQ ThinkSystem 2.5" U.2 P5520 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
2.5-inch SSDs - U.3 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7A95049 C2BY ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 PRO 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95050 C2BR ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 PRO 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95051 C2BS ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 PRO 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95052 C2BT ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 PRO 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A95053 C2BU ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7500 PRO 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A91176 BZC1 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 6500 ION 30.72TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A79646 BNF3 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 PRO 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A79647 BNF2 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 PRO 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A79648 BNF5 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 PRO 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A79649 BNF4 ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 PRO 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
4XB7A83097 BQAV ThinkSystem 2.5" U.3 7450 PRO 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 32
Table 49. 7mm 2.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
7mm 2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7A82264 BQ1U ThinkSystem 7mm 5400 PRO 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A82265 BQ1V ThinkSystem 7mm 5400 PRO 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A82266 BQ1W ThinkSystem 7mm 5400 PRO 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A17106 BK79 ThinkSystem 7mm S4520 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 2
4XB7A17107 BK7A ThinkSystem 7mm S4520 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 2
4XB7A17108 BK7B ThinkSystem 7mm S4520 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 2
Table 50. 7mm 2.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
7mm 2.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7A90096 BXMN ThinkSystem 7mm U.2 PM9A3 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A90097 BXMM ThinkSystem 7mm U.2 PM9A3 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A90098 BXML ThinkSystem 7mm U.2 PM9A3 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A82853 BPZ4 ThinkSystem 7mm U.3 7450 PRO 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A82855 BPZ5 ThinkSystem 7mm U.3 7450 PRO 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A82856 BPZ6 ThinkSystem 7mm U.3 7450 PRO 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 2
Table 51. 3.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS HDDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 12 Gb NL SAS
4XB7B01233 C5WY ThinkSystem 3.5" 2TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00042 AUU5 ThinkSystem 3.5" 2TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01235 C5X9 ThinkSystem 3.5" 4TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
7XB7A00043 AUU6 ThinkSystem 3.5" 4TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01237 C5XB ThinkSystem 3.5" 6TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00044 AUU7 ThinkSystem 3.5" 6TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01239 C5XD ThinkSystem 3.5" 8TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00045 B0YR ThinkSystem 3.5" 8TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD TCE No 20
4XB7B01241 C5XF ThinkSystem 3.5" 10TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
7XB7A00046 AUUG ThinkSystem 3.5" 10TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
7XB7A00067 B117 ThinkSystem 3.5" 12TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD TCE No 20
4XB7A93788 C4DA ThinkSystem 3.5" 12TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
4XB7A13906 B496 ThinkSystem 3.5" 14TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A13911 B7EZ ThinkSystem 3.5" 16TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A93786 C4D8 ThinkSystem 3.5" 16TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A38266 BCFP ThinkSystem 3.5" 18TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A80353 BPKU ThinkSystem 3.5" 20TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD TCE No 20
4XB7A93784 C4D6 ThinkSystem 3.5" 20TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A83766 BTR7 ThinkSystem 3.5" 22TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A93007 C2BH ThinkSystem 3.5" 24TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD TCE Support 20
3.5-inch hot-swap SED HDDs - 12 Gb NL SAS
7XB7A00066 B0YQ ThinkSystem 3.5" 8TB 7.2K SAS 12Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD FIPS Not TCE Support 20
Table 52. 3.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA HDDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch hot-swap HDDs - 6 Gb NL SATA
4XB7A97045 C5X6 ThinkSystem 3.5" 1TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00049 AUUF ThinkSystem 3.5" 1TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01234 C5X8 ThinkSystem 3.5" 2TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
7XB7A00050 AUUD ThinkSystem 3.5" 2TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01236 C5XA ThinkSystem 3.5" 4TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
7XB7A00051 AUU8 ThinkSystem 3.5" 4TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512n HDD TCE No 20
4XB7B01238 C5XC ThinkSystem 3.5" 6TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00052 AUUA ThinkSystem 3.5" 6TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01240 C5XE ThinkSystem 3.5" 8TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00053 AUU9 ThinkSystem 3.5" 8TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7B01242 C5X7 ThinkSystem 3.5" 10TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
7XB7A00054 AUUB ThinkSystem 3.5" 10TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
7XB7A00068 B118 ThinkSystem 3.5" 12TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A93787 C4D9 ThinkSystem 3.5" 12TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A13907 B497 ThinkSystem 3.5" 14TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A13914 B7F0 ThinkSystem 3.5" 16TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A93785 C4D7 ThinkSystem 3.5" 16TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
4XB7A38130 BCFH ThinkSystem 3.5" 18TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A80354 BPKV ThinkSystem 3.5" 20TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A93783 C4D5 ThinkSystem 3.5" 20TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD v2 TCE Support 20
4XB7A83765 BTR8 ThinkSystem 3.5" 22TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A93008 C2BJ ThinkSystem 3.5" 24TB 7.2K SATA 6Gb Hot Swap 512e HDD Not TCE Support 20
Table 53. 3.5-inch hot-swap 24 Gb SAS SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 24 Gb SAS - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7B07616 CABM ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 800GB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
4XB7B07617 CABP ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 1.6TB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
4XB7B07618 CABN ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 3.2TB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
4XB7B07619 CAC8 ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 6.4TB Mixed Use SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
3.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 24 Gb SAS - Read Intensive/Capacity (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B07606 CAFQ ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 960GB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B07607 CAFN ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 1.92TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
4XB7B07608 CAFP ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 3.84TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
4XB7B07609 CAFM ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 7.68TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
4XB7B07610 CAFR ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 15.36TB Read Intensive SAS 24Gb HS SSD TCE Support 20
Table 54. 3.5-inch hot-swap 12 Gb SAS SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 12 Gb SAS - Write Intensive (10+ DWPD)
4XB7A83218 BR0W ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3750 400GB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A83219 BR0V ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3750 800GB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A83220 BR0U ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3750 1.6TB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A83221 BR0T ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3750 3.2TB Write Intensive SAS 12Gb HS SSD Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A70011 BG03 ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3732 400GB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A70010 BG02 ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3732 800GB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A70009 BG01 ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3732 1.6TB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 20
4XB7A70008 BG00 ThinkSystem 3.5" Nytro 3732 3.2TB Performance SAS 12Gb Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 20
Table 55. 3.5-inch hot-swap 6 Gb SATA SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7B11652 CCZK ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 480GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B11653 CCZJ ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 960GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B11654 CCZH ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 1.92TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B11655 CCZG ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 3.84TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A90888 BYM3 ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 480GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 20
4XB7A90889 BYM7 ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 960GB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 Not TCE No 20
4XB7A90890 BYM8 ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 1.92TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 Not TCE No 20
4XB7A90891 BYLX ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 3.84TB Mixed Use SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 20
3.5-inch hot-swap SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B11648 CCZP ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B11649 CCZN ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B11650 CCZM ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 1.92TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7B11651 CCZL ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 3.84TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD SED Not TCE Support 20
4XB7A90878 BYLW ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 Not TCE No 20
4XB7A90879 BYLJ ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 20
4XB7A90880 BYLY ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 20
4XB7A90881 BYLZ ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 1.92TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 20
4XB7A90882 BYM0 ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 3.84TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 TCE No 20
4XB7A90883 BYM1 ThinkSystem 3.5" VA 7.68TB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD v2 Not TCE No 20
4XB7A17118 BA7K ThinkSystem 3.5" S4520 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS SSD Not TCE No 20
Table 56. 3.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 5.0 NVMe SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 5.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B13984 CFA6 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 VA 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B13985 CFA5 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 VA 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B13986 CFA4 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 VA 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B13987 CFA3 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 VA 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 5.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
Table 57. 3.5-inch hot-swap PCIe 4.0 NVMe SSDs
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
3.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Write Intensive (10+ DWPD)
4XB7A17161 BMM7 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5800X 400GB Write Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE No 12
4XB7A17162 BMM5 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5800X 800GB Write Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE No 12
4XB7A77070 BMM6 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5800X 1.6TB Write Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE No 12
3.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Mixed Use (3-5 DWPD)
4XB7B01883 C6M6 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 Solidigm P5620 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B01884 C6M7 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 Solidigm P5620 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B01885 C6M8 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 Solidigm P5620 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A17141 BNEK ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5620 1.6TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A17143 BNEM ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5620 3.2TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A17144 BNEN ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5620 6.4TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A17148 BNEP ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5620 12.8TB Mixed Use NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
3.5-inch SSDs - U.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B01871 C6MD ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 Solidigm P5520 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B01872 C6ME ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 Solidigm P5520 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7B01873 C6MF ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 Solidigm P5520 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A13632 BNES ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5520 1.92TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A76777 BNET ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5520 3.84TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A76778 BNEU ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5520 7.68TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
4XB7A76779 BNF0 ThinkSystem 3.5" U.2 P5520 15.36TB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 HS SSD Not TCE Support 12
Table 58. M.2 SATA non-hot-swap drives
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
M.2 SSDs - 6 Gb SATA - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B07587 CAC9 ThinkSystem M.2 VA 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb NHS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7B07588 CABU ThinkSystem M.2 VA 480GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb NHS SSD TCE Support 2
4XB7B07589 CACA ThinkSystem M.2 VA 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb NHS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A89422 BYF7 ThinkSystem M.2 ER3 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb NHS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A82286 BQ1Z ThinkSystem M.2 5400 PRO 240GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb NHS SSD Not TCE Support 2
7N47A00130 AUUV ThinkSystem M.2 128GB SATA 6Gbps Non-Hot Swap SSD Not TCE No 2
Table 59. M.2 PCIe 4.0 NVMe non-hot-swap drives
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 SED
support		 Max
Qty
M.2 SSDs - PCIe 4.0 NVMe - Read Intensive (<3 DWPD)
4XB7B09650 CBSZ ThinkSystem M.2 VA 480GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 NHS SSD TCE Support 2
4XB7B09651 CBT0 ThinkSystem M.2 VA 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 NHS SSD Not TCE Support 2
4XB7A90102 BXMH ThinkSystem M.2 PM9A3 960GB Read Intensive NVMe PCIe 4.0 x4 NHS SSD Not TCE Support 2

USB flash drive

For general portable storage needs, the server also supports the USB flash drive option that is listed in the following table.

Table 60. USB memory key
Part number Feature Description Top Choice Express
4X77A77065 BNWN ThinkSystem USB 32GB USB 3.0 Flash Drive Not TCE

Internal backup units

The server does not supports any internal backup units, such as tape drives or RDX drives. External backup units are available as described in the External backup units section.

Optical drives

The server supports the external USB optical drive listed in the following table.

Table 61. External optical drive
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
7XA7A05926 AVV8 ThinkSystem External USB DVD RW Optical Disk Drive TCE

The drive is based on the Lenovo Slim DVD Burner DB65 drive and supports the following formats: DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD-ROM, DVD-R DL, CD-RW, CD-R, CD-ROM.

I/O expansion

The server supports up to 10x total PCIe slots, plus a slot dedicated to the OCP adapter (either rear or front, but not both). The 10x slots are either 10x rear-facing slots, or a combination of 6x rear + 2x front PCIe slots.

The server also offers a dedicated OCP 3.0 SFF slot for networking, located either at the rear or front of the server. Slot availability is based on riser selection.

Topics in this section:

  • Slot layout and connections
  • Ordering information
  • Serial port
  • OCP slot filler

Slot layout and connections

The slots at the rear are provided by riser cards as follows:

  • Riser 1: Slots 1, 2 and 3, all full-height slots
  • Riser 2: Slots 4, 5, and 6, all full-height slots
  • Riser 3: Slot 7 and 8
    • Without Riser 4: both full-height slots
    • With Riser 4: both low-profile slots
  • Riser 4: Slots 9 and 10, both low-profile slots

The slots in each riser are either PCIe x16 or PCIe x8 depending on the riser card selected as listed in the table below. All x8 slots are open-ended and physically support x16 adapters. Depending on the risers selected, slots are either PCIe 5.0 or PCIe 4.0. OCP slot is PCIe 4.0 x16.

The SR655 V3 also supports front-accessible PCIe slots: two PCIe 4.0 or PCIe 5.0 x16 slots plus a dedicated OCP 3.0 SFF slot for networking. When front slots are used, rear slots 7-10 (Riser 3 & Riser 4) are not available as they use the same connectors. Front-accessible slots are as follows:

  • Slot 11: full-height half-length FHHL slot
  • Slot 12: full-height half-length FHHL slot

OCP slot: When front slots are configured, the rear OCP slot is disconnected and cannot be used.

Riser 3 support with onboard NVMe: When Riser 3 is configured, only up to 4x NVMe drives can be connected using the onboard NVMe connections.

As discussed in the Internal storage section, the server supports drive bays in the rear of the server. Depending on the drive bays selected, the number of slots available for adapters is reduced. The figure below shows the supported combinations of slots and drive bays.

Internal HBA/RAID adapter: For configurations with 2.5-inch front drive bays, an internal RAID adapter or HBA can be installed in a dedicated space and cabled to a PCIe x8 connector, thereby freeing up a slot for other purposes.

The following figure shows the locations of the rear-accessible slots for each configuration selection. The OCP slot in located in the lower-left corner.

SR655 V3 slots
Figure 16. SR655 V3 rear slot configurations

The following figure shows the locations of the front-accessible slots.

SR655 V3 front slots
Figure 17. SR655 V3 front slots

Ordering information

The following table lists the riser cards available for CTO builds and for field upgrades. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

No slots: It is also possible to build a configuration without any slots, in which case slot fillers will be derived in the configurator. Slots can be added later as field upgrades using option part numbers as listed in the table.

Table 62. Riser cards
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Purpose Slot configuration*
(Green = Gen5, Blue = Gen4)
Rear Riser 1 (FH slots) Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3
4XH7A82898 BPQU ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x8/x8 PCIe Gen5 Riser 1 or 2 Not TCE 3 slots PCIe 5.0 Gen5 x16 Gen5 x8 Gen5 x8
4XH7A82896 BLKL ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x8/x8 PCIe Gen4 Riser1 or 2 TCE 3 slots PCIe 4.0 Gen4 x16 Gen4 x8 Gen4 x8
4XH7A82900 BPQV ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x16/E PCIe Gen5 Riser1 or 2 TCE 2 slots PCIe 5.0; COM port or 7mm drives in slot 3 Gen5 x16 Gen5 x16 No slot
4XH7A82892 BLKM ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x16/E PCIe Gen4 Riser1 or 2 TCE 2 slots PCIe 4.0; COM port or 7mm drives in slot 3 Gen4 x16 Gen4 x16 No slot
4XH7A82902 BPQW ThinkSystem V3 2U E/x16/x16 PCIe Gen5 Riser1 or 2 TCE PCIe 5.0 in slot 2; DW GPU in slot 2 No slot Gen5 x16 Gen4 x16
4XH7A82894 BLKN ThinkSystem V3 2U G4 E/x16/x16 PCIe Riser1 or 2 Not TCE 2 slots PCIe 4.0; DW GPU in slot 2 No slot Gen4 x16 Gen4 x16
4XH7A82890 BLKP ThinkSystem V3 2U x16 PCIe Gen4 Riser1 or 2 TCE 1 slot PCIe 4.0; For 4x 3.5-inch rear drives No slot No slot Gen4 x16
Rear Riser 2 (FH slots) Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6
4XH7A82898 BPQU ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x8/x8 PCIe Gen5 Riser 1 or 2 Not TCE 3 slots PCIe 5.0 Gen5 x16 Gen5 x8 Gen5 x8
4XH7A82896 BLKL ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x8/x8 PCIe Gen4 Riser1 or 2 TCE 3 slots PCIe 4.0 Gen4 x16 Gen4 x8 Gen4 x8
4XH7A82900 BPQV ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x16/E PCIe Gen5 Riser1 or 2 TCE 2 slots PCIe 5.0; COM port or 7mm drives in slot 6 Gen5 x16 Gen5 x16 No slot
4XH7A82892 BLKM ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x16/E PCIe Gen4 Riser1 or 2 TCE 2 slots PCIe 4.0; COM port or 7mm drives in slot 6 Gen4 x16 Gen4 x16 No slot
4XH7A82902 BPQW ThinkSystem V3 2U E/x16/x16 PCIe Gen5 Riser1 or 2 TCE PCIe 5.0 in slot 5; DW GPU in slot 5 No slot Gen5 x16 Gen4 x16
4XH7A82894 BLKN ThinkSystem V3 2U G4 E/x16/x16 PCIe Riser1 or 2 Not TCE 2 slots PCIe 4.0; DW GPU in slot 5 No slot Gen4 x16 Gen4 x16
4XH7A82890 BLKP ThinkSystem V3 2U x16 PCIe Gen4 Riser1 or 2 TCE 1 slot PCIe 4.0; For 2x or 4x 3.5-inch rear drives No slot No slot Gen4 x16
Rear Riser 3 (2x FH slots) Slot 7 Slot 8
4XH7A86399 BLL9 ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x16 PCIe Gen5 Riser3 Kit TCE 2x PCIe 5.0 x16 slots; DW GPU in slot 7 Gen5 x16 Gen4 x16
4XH7A86397 BPKG ThinkSystem V3 2U x16/x16 PCIe Gen4 Riser3 Kit with Cage TCE 2x PCIe 4.0 x16 slots; DW GPU in slot 7 Gen4 x16 Gen4 x16
4XH7A86398 BPKH ThinkSystem V3 2U x8/x8 PCIe Gen5 Riser3 Kit with Cage Not TCE 2x PCIe 5.0 x8 slots Gen5 x8 Gen4 x8
4XH7A86396 BPKF ThinkSystem V3 2U x8/x8 PCIe Gen4 Riser3 Kit with Cage TCE 2x PCIe 4.0 x8 slots Gen4 x8 Gen4 x8
Rear Riser 3 & 4 (4x LP slots) Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10

4XH7A87546

 BQ2W† ThinkSystem V3 2U PCIe Gen5 Riser 3/4-part 1 for Rear 10 slots (Gen4) Not TCE 2x PCIe 4.0 x8 slots Gen4 x8 Gen4 x8
BTMS† ThinkSystem V3 2U PCIe Gen5 Riser 3/4-part 2 for Rear 10 slots (Gen4) Not TCE 2x PCIe 4.0 x8 slots Gen4 x8 Gen4 x8
Front Riser Slot 11 Slot 12
CTO only BQ2X ThinkSystem V3 2U Front x16/x16 PCIe G4 Riser Not TCE 2x PCIe 4.0 x16 front-accessible slots Gen4 x16 Gen4 x16
CTO only C1PN ThinkSystem V3 2U 2X16 Front PCIe Gen5 Riser TCE 2x PCIe 5.0 x16 front-accessible slots Gen5 x16 Gen5 x16

* All PCIe x8 slots are open ended and will physically support x16 adapters
† In the configurator, when feature BQ2W is selected, BTMS is automatically derived and provides slots 9 & 10. 4XH7A87546 contains both risers. Note that in the SR655 V3, risers BQ2W and BTMS supply Gen4 slots, not Gen5, even though the feature codes are named "Gen5".

Configuration rules:

  • For best performance, install PCIe 5.0 adapters in PCIe 5.0 (Gen5) slots
  • The server only supports one OCP slot, either in the rear of the server or the front of the server, not both
  • Front slots are supported only with rear slots in Riser 1 and 2. Front slots cannot be used in combination with Riser 3 (or Riser 4) as they use the same connectors.
  • If you want to configure 4x low profile slots for slots 7-10, select feature BQ2W which provides riser 3 (slots 7, 8). Feature BTMS will then be automatically derived to provide riser 4 (slots 9 & 10), along with the necessary cables. Option part number 4XH7A87546 contains both of these risers and the cables.
  • If you want to add both a 7mm drive enclosure plus 2x PCIe slots above it, you will need to order the 7mm drive option (either 4XH7A85898 or 4XH7A85899) plus the x16/x16/E riser kit (4XH7A82900 for PCIe Gen 5 or 4XH7A82892 for Gen 4). The riser kit part number provides the 2-slot riser card.
  • All PCIe x8 slots are open ended and will physically support x16 adapters
  • To support Riser 3 (or Riser 3+4), the following must both apply:
    • No rear drives are configured
    • If the Onboard NVMe ports are used, then no more than 4 NVMe or AnyBay drive bays are configured (eg a 3.5-inch backplane of 8x SAS/SATA + 4x AnyBay is supported, or a 2.5-inch backplane of 6x SAS/SATA + 2x AnyBay is supported)

Serial port

The SR655 V3 optionally supports a RS-232 serial port by adding a COM port bracket to either slot 3 or slot 6. Ordering information is shown in the following table.

Front PCIe slots: The serial port is not supported in the front PCIe slots

Table 63. Serial port
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
4X97A82921 BMNJ ThinkSystem V2/V3 1U COM Port Upgrade Kit TCE

The bracket is shown in the following figure. The option part number includes both Low Profile and Full Height brackets.

ThinkSystem COM Port Upgrade Kit
Figure 18. ThinkSystem COM Port Upgrade Kit v2

OCP slot filler

If customers or partners remove an OCP adapter from the server, we recommend that a slot cover (slot filler) be installed in its place to ensure proper airflow in the server. Ordering information is listed in the following table.

Tip: For CTO orders and preconfigured models, slot fillers are automatically installed in slots where an OCP adapter is not installed.

Table 64. OCP slot filler
Part number Description
4XF7B06188 ThinkSystem OCP3 FILLER

Network adapters

The server has a dedicated OCP 3.0 SFF slot with PCIe 4.0 x16 host interface. See Figure 3 for the location of the OCP slot.

The following table lists the supported OCP adapters. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

One port can optionally be shared with the XCC management processor for Wake-on-LAN and NC-SI support. Only 1 OCP card can be installed in the server, either rear-accessible or front-accessible.

Table 65. Supported OCP adapters
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Maximum
supported		 Windows 10/11
support
Gigabit Ethernet
4XC7A08235 B5T1 ThinkSystem Broadcom 5719 1GbE RJ45 4-port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A88428 BW97 ThinkSystem Intel I350 1GbE RJ45 4-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter V2 TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A08277 B93E ThinkSystem Intel I350 1GbE RJ45 4-port OCP Ethernet Adapter Not TCE 1 Supported
10 Gb Ethernet - 10GBASE-T
4XC7A95696 C4GB ThinkSystem Broadcom 57412 10GBase-T 4-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A08236 B5ST ThinkSystem Broadcom 57416 10GBASE-T 2-port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A08240 B5T4 ThinkSystem Broadcom 57454 10GBASE-T 4-port OCP Ethernet Adapter Not TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A08278 BCD5 ThinkSystem Intel X710-T2L 10GBASE-T 2-port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A80268 BPPY ThinkSystem Intel X710-T4L 10GBase-T 4-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
25 Gb Ethernet
4XC7A08237 BN2T ThinkSystem Broadcom 57414 10/25GbE SFP28 2-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A80567 BPPW ThinkSystem Broadcom 57504 10/25GbE SFP28 4-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A08294 BCD4 ThinkSystem Intel E810-DA2 10/25GbE SFP28 2-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A80269 BP8L ThinkSystem Intel E810-DA4 10/25GbE SFP28 4-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter TCE 1 Supported
4XC7A62582 BE4T ThinkSystem Mellanox ConnectX-6 Lx 10/25GbE SFP28 2-port OCP Ethernet Adapter Not TCE 1 Supported
100 Gb Ethernet
4XC7A08243 BPPX ThinkSystem Broadcom 57508 100GbE QSFP56 2-Port OCP Ethernet Adapter Not TCE 1 Supported

The following table lists additional supported network adapters that can be installed in the regular PCIe slots. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

Table 66. Supported PCIe Network Adapters
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 PCIe
lanes		 Max
Qty		 Slots
supported		 Windows 10/11
support
Gigabit Ethernet
7ZT7A00484 AUZV ThinkSystem Broadcom 5719 1GbE RJ45 4-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12 Supported
7ZT7A00535 AUZW ThinkSystem I350-T4 PCIe 1Gb 4-Port RJ45 Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen2 x4 10 1-12 Supported
10 Gb Ethernet - 10GBASE-T
4XC7A95697 C4GC ThinkSystem Broadcom 57412 10GBase-T 4-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen3 x8 10 All FH slots‡ Supported
7ZT7A00496 AUKP ThinkSystem Broadcom 57416 10GBASE-T 2-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen3 x8 10 All FH slots Supported
4XC7A08245 B5SU ThinkSystem Broadcom 57454 10GBASE-T 4-port PCIe Ethernet Adapter Not TCE Gen3 x8 10 All FH slots Supported
4XC7A80266 BNWL ThinkSystem Intel X710-T2L 10GBase-T 2-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12 Supported
4XC7A79699 BMXB ThinkSystem Intel X710-T4L 10GBase-T 4-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12 Supported
25 Gb Ethernet
4XC7A84827 BUQK ThinkSystem AMD X3522 10/25GbE DSFP28 2-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter (Low Latency) Not TCE Gen4 x8 6 1-6, 8, 12 No
4XC7A08238 BK1H ThinkSystem Broadcom 57414 10/25GbE SFP28 2-port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12 Supported
4XC7A80566 BNWM ThinkSystem Broadcom 57504 10/25GbE SFP28 4-port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12 (FH slots) Supported
4XC7A08295 BCD6 ThinkSystem Intel E810-DA2 10/25GbE SFP28 2-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12 Supported
4XC7A80267 BP8M ThinkSystem Intel E810-DA4 10/25GbE SFP28 4-Port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12 (FH slots) Supported
4XC7A62580 BE4U ThinkSystem Mellanox ConnectX-6 Lx 10/25GbE SFP28 2-port PCIe Ethernet Adapter Not TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12 Supported
100 Gb Ethernet / HDR100 InfiniBand
4XC7A08297 BK1J ThinkSystem Broadcom 57508 100GbE QSFP56 2-Port PCIe 4 Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12 (FH slots) Supported
4XC7A08248 B8PP ThinkSystem Mellanox ConnectX-6 Dx 100GbE QSFP56 2-port PCIe Ethernet Adapter TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12, (FH slots) Supported
4C57A14177 B4R9 ThinkSystem Mellanox ConnectX-6 HDR100/100GbE QSFP56 1-port PCIe VPI Adapter Not TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12 (FH slots) No
4C57A14178 B4RA ThinkSystem Mellanox ConnectX-6 HDR100/100GbE QSFP56 2-port PCIe VPI Adapter Not TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12 (FH slots) No
200 Gb Ethernet / InfiniBand HDR/NDR200
4C57A15326 B4RC ThinkSystem Mellanox ConnectX-6 HDR/200GbE QSFP56 1-port PCIe 4 VPI Adapter Not TCE Gen4 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7,8, 11,12 (FH slots) No
4XC7A81883 BQBN ThinkSystem NVIDIA ConnectX-7 NDR200/200GbE QSFP112 2-port PCIe Gen5 x16 InfiniBand Adapter TCE Gen5 x16 5 1,2,4,5,7 (FH slots) No
4XC7B08942 CCVX ThinkSystem NVIDIA BlueField-3 B3220 VPI QSFP112 2P 200G PCIe Gen5 x16 with Tin Plating Connector Not TCE Gen5 x16 2* 1,2,4,5 No
4XC7A87752 BVBG ThinkSystem NVIDIA BlueField-3 B3220 VPI QSFP112 2P 200G PCIe Gen5 x16 Adapter Not TCE Gen5 x16 2* 1,2,4,5 No
400 Gb Ethernet / NDR InfiniBand
4XC7A95508 C51C ThinkSystem NVIDIA ConnectX-7 NDR400 OSFP 1-port PCIe Gen5 VPI Adapter Not TCE Gen5 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7, 11,12 (FH slots) No
4XC7A80289 BQ1N ThinkSystem NVIDIA ConnectX-7 NDR OSFP400 1-Port PCIe Gen5 x16 InfiniBand Adapter (InfiniBand only) Not TCE Gen5 x16 6 1,2,4,5,7, 11,12 (FH slots) No
4XC7B03668 C9AQ ThinkSystem NVIDIA ConnectX-8 8240 400GbE / 400Gb/s IB QSFP112 2-port PCIe Gen6 x16 (Generic FW) Not TCE Gen5 x16 2** 1,2,4,5,7, 11,12 (FH slots) No
400 Gb Omni-Path
4XC7B00020 C5MY ThinkSystem Cornelis CN5000 Omni-Path 1-Port QSFP112 HFI SuperNIC (Generic FW) Not TCE Gen5 x16 5 1,2,4,5,7 No

* Field upgrades to add BlueField-3 adapters require a power cable. See below.
‡ Requires a PCIe Gen4 riser; Not supported in a PCIe Gen5 riser

Configuration rules:

  • For ThinkSystem NVIDIA ConnectX-8 8240 400GbE / 400Gb/s IB QSFP112 2-port PCIe Gen6 x16 (Generic FW), 4XC7B03668
    • Only supported with 5th Gen EPYC processors; not supported with 4th Gen processors
    • Not supported with Cornelis CN5000 adapter

When adding a BlueField-3 adapter as a field upgrade, the power cable listed in the following table will also need to be ordered.

Table 67. Power cable for BlueField-3 adapters
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
4X97B02426 BMJL ThinkSystem V3 2U BlueField-3 B3220 Power Cable Kit Not TCE

For more information, including the transceivers and cables that each adapter supports, see the list of Lenovo Press Product Guides in the Networking adapters category:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/ethernet

Configuration requirements:

  • Adapters with a x16 host interface require a x16 slot to maximize performance
  • PCIe Gen5 adapters will require a Gen5 riser to maximize performance

  • E810 Ethernet and X350 RAID/HBAs: The use of both an Intel E810 network adapter and an X350 HBA/RAID adapter (9350, 5350 and 4350) is supported, however E810 firmware CVL4.3 or later is required. For details, see Support Tip HT513226.

Fibre Channel host bus adapters

The following table lists the Fibre Channel HBAs supported by the SR655 V3. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

No Windows 10/11 support: None of the adapters listed in the table are supported with Windows 10 or Windows 11.

Table 68. Fibre Channel HBAs
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 PCIe
lanes		 Max
qty		 Slots
supported
64 Gb Fibre Channel HBAs
4XC7A77485 BLC1 ThinkSystem Emulex LPe36002 64Gb 2-port PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12
32 Gb Fibre Channel HBAs
4XC7A76498 BJ3G ThinkSystem Emulex LPe35000 32Gb 1-port PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter v2 TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12
4XC7A76525 BJ3H ThinkSystem Emulex LPe35002 32Gb 2-port PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter V2 TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12
4XC7A08279 BA1G ThinkSystem QLogic QLE2770 32Gb 1-Port PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12
4XC7A08276 BA1F ThinkSystem QLogic QLE2772 32Gb 2-Port PCIe Fibre Channel Adapter TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-12
16 Gb Fibre Channel HBAs
01CV840 ATZV Emulex 16Gb Gen6 FC Dual-port HBA TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12
01CV830 ATZU Emulex 16Gb Gen6 FC Single-port HBA TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12
01CV760 ATZC QLogic 16Gb Enhanced Gen5 FC Dual-port HBA TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12
01CV750 ATZB QLogic 16Gb Enhanced Gen5 FC Single-port HBA TCE Gen3 x8 10 1-12

For more information, see the list of Lenovo Press Product Guides in the Host bus adapters category:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/hba

SAS adapters for external storage

The following table lists SAS HBAs and RAID adapters supported by SR655 V3 server for use with external storage. The table includes a Top Choice Express column; for CTO orders, select a TCE component for faster delivery. See the Top Choice section for more information.

No Windows 10/11 support: None of the adapters listed in the table are supported with Windows 10 or Windows 11.

Table 69. Adapters for external storage
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 PCIe
lanes		 Max
qty		 Slots
supported
SAS HBAs
4Y37A09724 B8P7 ThinkSystem 440-16e SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 12Gb HBA TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-10
4Y37A78837 BNWK ThinkSystem 440-8e SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 12Gb HBA Not TCE Gen4 x8 10 1-10
4Y37A85156 BWKP ThinkSystem 450W-16e SAS/SATA PCIe Gen4 24Gb HBA Not TCE Gen4 x16 5 1-7
External RAID adapters
4Y37A78836 BNWJ ThinkSystem RAID 940-8e 4GB Flash PCIe Gen4 12Gb Adapter TCE Gen4 x8 4 1-10

* See below regarding supercap requirements

For a comparison of the functions of the supported storage adapters, see the ThinkSystem RAID Adapter and HBA Reference:
https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1288#sr655-v3-support=SR655%2520V3&internal-or-external-ports=External

The RAID 940-8e uses a flash power module (supercap), which can be installed in one of up to four locations in the server depending on the server configuration. See the RAID flash power module (supercap) support section for details. The number of 940-8e RAID adapters supported is based on how many supercaps can be installed in the server. If an internal RAID adapter with flash power modules is installed, the maximum number of 940-8e adapters supported is reduced by 1.

For more information, see the list of Lenovo Press Product Guides in the Host bus adapters and RAID adapters categories:

https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/hba
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/raid

GPU adapters

This section describes the supported GPUs.

  • GPU part numbers
  • GPU Ready configurations
  • GPU configuration rules
  • Riser selections for double-wide GPUs
  • GPU Enablement Kit
  • GPU cable kits

GPU part numbers

The SR655 V3 supports the following graphics processing units (GPUs).

Table 70. Supported GPUs
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Controlled GPU TDP Aux
power		 PCIe
lanes		 Max
qty		 Slots
supported*		 Windows 10/11
support
Single-wide GPUs
4X67A84824 BS2C ThinkSystem NVIDIA L4 24GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU Not TCE Controlled 72W No Gen4 x16 8 1-7,11,12† Supported
4X67A81547 BQZT ThinkSystem NVIDIA A2 16GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU w/o CEC Not TCE No 60W No Gen4 x8 8 All FH slots Supported
CTO only BP05 ThinkSystem NVIDIA A2 16GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU Not TCE No 60W No Gen4 x8 8 All FH slots Supported
Double-wide GPUs
4X67A89325 BXAK ThinkSystem NVIDIA H100 NVL 94GB PCIe Gen5 Passive GPU Not TCE Controlled 400W Yes Gen5 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A82257 BR9U ThinkSystem NVIDIA H100 80GB PCIe Gen5 Passive GPU Not TCE Controlled 350W Yes Gen5 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A90669 BYFH ThinkSystem NVIDIA L40S 48GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU Not TCE Controlled 350W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7*† Supported
4X67B09095 CBU5 ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX PRO 6000 Blackwell Max-Q Workstation Edition 96GB PCIe Gen5 Active GPU Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen5 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A89324 C2DP ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX 6000 Ada 48GB PCIe Active GPU Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7*† Supported
4X67A71310 BFT0 ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX A6000 48GB PCIe Active GPU Not TCE No 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A81102 BP04 ThinkSystem AMD Instinct MI210 PCIe Gen4 Passive Accelerator Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* No
4X67A84823 BT87 ThinkSystem NVIDIA L40 48GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7*† Supported
4X67A76715 BQZP ThinkSystem NVIDIA A100 80GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU w/o CEC Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A72593 BQZQ ThinkSystem NVIDIA A40 48GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU w/o CEC Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
CTO only BEL4 ThinkSystem NVIDIA A40 48GB PCIe 4.0 Passive GPU w/o CEC Not TCE Controlled 300W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A76727 BQZU ThinkSystem NVIDIA A16 64GB Gen4 PCIe Passive GPU Not TCE No 250W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
CTO only BNFE ThinkSystem NVIDIA A16 64GB Gen4 PCIe Passive GPU Not TCE No 250W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67B09230 CC4U ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX PRO 4500 Blackwell Workstation Edition 32GB PCIe Gen5 Active GPU Not TCE Controlled 200W Yes Gen5 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A96491 C4RX ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX 4500 Ada 24GB PCIe Active GPU Not TCE No 200W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A76726 BNFD ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX A4500 20GB PCIe Active GPU Not TCE No 200W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A76581 BQZR ThinkSystem NVIDIA A30 24GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU w/o CEC Not TCE Controlled 165W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
CTO only BJHG ThinkSystem NVIDIA A30 24GB PCIe Gen4 Passive GPU Not TCE Controlled 165W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported
4X67A76720 BMT9 ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX A2000 12GB PCIe Active GPU Not TCE No 70W Yes Gen4 x16 3 2, 5, 7* Supported

* When a double-wide GPU is installed in slot 2, 5 or 7, the adjacent slot 1, 4 and 8 respectively is not available
† Requires the use of a PCIe Gen5 slot; see below for details

For information about these GPUs, see the ThinkSystem GPU Summary, available at:
https://lenovopress.com/lp0768-thinksystem-thinkagile-gpu-summary

GPU Ready configurations

For CTO orders, the SR655 V3 also supports the selection of a placeholder for a GPU. This selection results in a "GPU ready" configuration which ensures that the server ships with the components needed for GPU installation (GPU power cables, air ducts, power supplies, fans, etc) without actually including the GPUs themselves. The following table lists the ordering information for CTO orders.

Tip: These GPU-Ready feature codes can only be selected with general purpose CTO models such as 7D9ECTO1WW. They are not offered in "for AI" models such as 7D9ECTO3WW. See the Models section for more information.

Table 71. GPU-Ready configurations - ordering information
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express
CTO only BW40 ThinkSystem NVIDIA A4500 GPU-Ready Installation Not TCE
CTO only BVLL ThinkSystem NVIDIA H100 GPU-Ready Installation Not TCE
CTO only BZUS ThinkSystem NVIDIA L40S GPU-Ready Installation Not TCE
CTO only CG6M ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX PRO 4500 Blackwell Workstation Edition GPU-Ready Installation TCE
CTO only CGNJ ThinkSystem NVIDIA RTX PRO 6000 Blackwell Max-Q Workstation Edition GPU-Ready Installation Not TCE
CTO only BP4X ThinkSystem Double Width GPU-Ready Installation (for all other supported DW GPUs) TCE

GPU configuration rules

The following configuration requirements must be met when installing GPUs:

  • The table includes a Controlled GPU column. If a GPU is listed as Controlled, that means the GPU is not offered in certain markets, as determined by the US Government. If a GPU is listed as No, that means the GPU is not controlled and is available in most markets.
  • GPUs can be configured in CTO orders as follows:
    • A Controlled GPU can only be configured using one of the Base CTO models designated with "for AI", such as 7D9ECTO3WW, as listed in the Models section.
    • A GPU that is not controlled can only be configured using one of the Base CTO models that is not named "for AI", such as 7D9ECTO1WW, as listed in the Models section.
  • All GPUs installed must be identical
  • When a double-wide GPU is installed in slot 2, 5 or 7, the adjacent slot 1, 4 and 8 respectively is not available
  • Flash storage adapters are not supported.
  • Middle drive bays and Rear drive bays are not supported
  • GPUs are not supported with CPUs with a TDP of more than 300W
  • The following GPUs require a PCIe Gen5 slot:
    • NVIDIA L4: Requires a PCIe Gen5 slot (all processors)
    • NVIDIA L40: Requires a PCIe Gen5 slot for 5th Gen processors (a PCIe Gen4 slot is supported for 4th Gen processors)
    • NVIDIA L40S: Requires a PCIe Gen5 slot for 5th Gen processors (a PCIe Gen4 slot is supported for 4th Gen processors)
    • NVIDIA RTX 6000 Ada: Requires a PCIe Gen5 slot for 5th Gen processors (a PCIe Gen4 slot is supported for 4th Gen processors)
  • The use of 8x NVIDIA L4 GPUs requires a mix of x16 and x8 slots

  • Some NVIDIA A Series GPUs are available as two feature codes, one with a CEC chip and one without a CEC chip (ones without the CEC chip have "w/o CEC" in the name). The CEC is a secondary Hardware Root of Trust (RoT) module that provides an additional layer of security, which can be used by customers who have high regulatory requirements or high security standards. NVIDIA uses a multi-layered security model and hence the protection offered by the primary Root of Trust embedded in the GPU is expected to be sufficient for most customers. The CEC defeatured products still offer Secure Boot, Secure Firmware Update, Firmware Rollback Protection, and In-Band Firmware Update Disable. Specifically, without the CEC chip, the GPU does not support Key Revocation or Firmware Attestation. CEC and non-CEC GPUs of the same type of GPU can be mixed in field upgrades.

For additional requirements related to GPUs, see the GPU Configuration section of the Thermal Rules page in the Information Center:
https://pubs.lenovo.com/sr655-v3/thermal_rules

Riser selections for double-wide GPUs

When a double-wide GPU is installed in slot 2, 5 or 7, the adjacent slot 1, 4 and 8 respectively is not available. The riser cards listed in the following table are used with double-wide GPUs.

Table 72. Risers needed for double-wide GPUs
Riser Part number Feature code Description Top Choice
Express
PCIe Gen 5 slots
Riser 1 (GPU in slot 2) 4XH7A82902 BPQW ThinkSystem V3 2U E/x16/x16 PCIe Gen5 Riser 1/2 Option Kit TCE
Riser 2 (GPU in slot 5) 4XH7A82902 BPQW ThinkSystem V3 2U E/x16/x16 PCIe Gen5 Riser 1/2 Option Kit TCE
Riser 3 (GPU in slot 7) 4XH7A86399 BLL9 ThinkSystem SR655 V3 x16/x16 PCIe G5 Riser3 Option Kit TCE
PCIe Gen 4 slots
Riser 1 (GPU in slot 2) 4XH7A82894 BLKN ThinkSystem V3 2U E/x16/x16 PCIe Gen4 Riser 1/2 Option Kit Not TCE
Riser 2 (GPU in slot 5) 4XH7A82894 BLKN ThinkSystem V3 2U E/x16/x16 PCIe Gen4 Riser 1/2 Option Kit Not TCE
Riser 3 (GPU in slot 7) 4XH7A86397 BPKG ThinkSystem SR655 V3 x16/x16 PCIe G4 Riser3 Option Kit TCE

GPU Enablement Kit

When installing any full-length GPU as a field upgrade, you will also need to order the GPU Enablement Kit as listed in the following table. This kit is not required for the NVIDIA A2 GPU.

Table 73. ThinkSystem SR655 V3 GPU Enablement Kit
Part number Description Maximum
supported
4X67A86438

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 GPU Enablement Kit (for double-wide GPUs)

  • 1x 2U performance heatsink
  • 1x ThinkSystem 2U GPU air duct
  • 3x GPU extension air ducts
  • 3x Air duct fillers
  • 3x GPU power cables for single-wide GPUs (SBB7A44786)
  • 3x GPU power Y-cables when 2x single-wide GPUs installed on one riser (SBB7A23757)
  • 3x 8-pin GPU power cables for double-wide GPUs (SBB7A49792)
  • 3x 16-pin GPU power cables for double-wide GPUs (SBB7A66338)
 1

The following figure shows the GPU air duct with GPU air duct fillers and GPU extend air ducts installed. Note that the drawings might not 100% reflect the shipping components.

SR655 V3 GPU air duct
Figure 19. SR655 V3 GPU air duct

GPU cable kits

The following cable kits are offered to provide auxiliary power cables for GPUs that require one. See the Supported GPUs table to see which GPUs require an auxiliary power cable.

Configuration notes:

  • This cable kits are only required for field upgrades; factory (CTO) orders will automatically include any required cables.
  • For double-wide GPUs, The DW (double-wide) cable kit is only required if you are adding additional double-wide GPUs to a server that already has a DW GPU installed from a CTO order. If you are doing a field upgrade to install the first DW GPU to a server, order the ThinkSystem SR655 V3 GPU Enablement Kit, 4X67A86438 instead, since the Enablement Kit includes the necessary power cables.
  • The SW (single-wide) cable kit is required if you are doing any field upgrades to add a single-wide GPU that requires an auxiliary power cable (GPU power > 75 W), however, all currently supported GPUs do not require auxiliary power cables.

Table 74. GPU cable kits
Part number Description
4X97A86165

ThinkSystem SR665 V3/SR655 V3 DW GPU Cable Option Kit

  • 3x 16-pin GPU power cables for H100 GPUs (SBB7A66338, BRWK)
  • 3x GPU power cables RTX A4500 (SBB7A44786, BMJL)
  • 3x 8-pin GPU power cables for all other double-wide GPU (SBB7A49792, BMPQ)
4X97A86166

ThinkSystem SR655 V3 SW GPU Cable Option Kit

  • 3x Power cables for SW GPUs (SBB7A44786, BMJL)
  • 3x Power Y-cable when 2x single-wide GPUs installed on one riser (SBB7A23757, BC09)

Cooling

The SR655 V3 server has up to six 60 mm hot-swap variable-speed fans. The server offers N+1 redundancy. The server also has one or two additional fans integrated in each of the two power supplies. Most configurations require 6 system fans. If Riser 3 is not configured, then only 4 system fans are needed.

Depending on the configuration, the server will need either Standard fans (single-rotor 17K RPM) or Performance fans (dual-rotor 21K RPM).

Under all of the following conditions, standard fans can be used:

  • CPU with TDP ≤ 240W
  • No GPUs
  • No 100GbE or higher network adapters
  • No 3DS RDIMMs
  • Front drive bays not 12x 3.5-inch
  • No mid-chassis drive bays
  • No rear drive bays

If any conditions are not met, Performance fans are required.

Ordering information for the fans is listed in the following table.

Table 75. Fan ordering information
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Quantity
required
4F17A14497 BH8F ThinkSystem V3 2U Standard Fan Option Kit TCE 4 or 6*
4F17A82884 BLL6 ThinkSystem V3 2U Performance Fan Option Kit TCE 4 or 6*

* 6 fans required if Riser 3 is configured

Power supplies

The SR655 V3 supports up to two redundant hot-swap power supplies.

  • Power supply ordering information
  • Power supply LEDs
  • Power cords (C13 connectors)
  • Power cords (C19 connectors)
  • -48V DC power cord

Power supply ordering information

The power supply choices are listed in the following table. Both power supplies used in server must be identical.

Tip: When configuring a server in the DCSC configurator, power consumption is calculated precisely by interfacing with Lenovo Capacity Planner. You can therefore select the appropriate power supply for your configuration. However, do consider future upgrades that may require additional power needs.

Table 76. Power supply options
Part number Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Connector Max
quantity		 110V AC 220V AC 240V DC
PRC only		 -48V DC
AC input power - 80 PLUS Titanium efficiency
4P57A82019 BR1X ThinkSystem 750W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v3 TCE C13 2 No Yes Yes No
CTO only C07V ThinkSystem 750W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v4 TCE C13 2 No Yes Yes No
4P57A72666 BLKH ThinkSystem 1100W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply TCE C13 2 No Yes Yes No
4P57A78359 BPK9 ThinkSystem 1800W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply TCE C13 2 No Yes Yes No
4P57A72667 BKTJ ThinkSystem 2600W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v4 TCE C19 2 No Yes Yes No
AC input power - 80 PLUS Platinum efficiency
4P57A72670 BNFG ThinkSystem 750W 230V/115V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v3 TCE C13 2 Yes Yes Yes No
4P57A72671 BNFH ThinkSystem 1100W 230V/115V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v3 TCE C13 2 Yes Yes Yes No
4P57A78362 BMUF ThinkSystem 1800W 230V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v2 TCE C13 2 No Yes Yes No
4P57A26295 B962 ThinkSystem 2400W 230V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply Not TCE C19 2 No Yes Yes No
-48V DC input power
4P57A89415 CCTL ThinkSystem 1100W -48V DC Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v2 Not TCE DC 2 No No No Yes
4P57A26296 B8QE ThinkSystem 1100W -48V DC Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply Not TCE DC 2 No No No Yes

Supported power supplies are auto-sensing dual-voltage units, supporting both 110V AC (100-127V 50/60 Hz) and 220V AC (200-240V 50/60 Hz) power. For China customers, all power supplies support 240V DC.

AC power supplies up to 1800W have a C14 connector. AC power supplies 2400W and above have a C20 connector. Power supply options do not include a line cord. For server configurations, the inclusion of a power cord is model dependent. Configure-to-order models can be configured without power cords if desired.

The ThinkSystem 1100W -48V DC Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v2 (4P57A89415) has a Weidmuller TOP 4GS/3 7.6 terminal as shown in the following figure. The ThinkSystem 1100W -48V DC Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply (4P57A26296) has the same connector type.

ThinkSystem 1100W -48V DC Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v2, 4P57A89415
Figure 20. Connector on the ThinkSystem 1100W -48V DC Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v2 (4P57A89415)

Power supply LEDs

The supported hot-swap power supplies have the following LEDs:

  • Power input LED: 
    • Green: The power supply is connected to the AC power source
    • Off: The power supply is disconnected from the AC power source or a power problem has occurred
  • Power output LED:
    • Green: The server is on and the power supply is working normally
    • Blinking green: The power supply is in Zero-output/Standby mode (see below)
    • Off: The server is powered off, or the power supply is not working properly
  • Power supply error LED:
    • Off: The power supply is working normally
    • Yellow: The power supply has failed

Power cords (C13 connectors)

Line cords and rack power cables with C13 connectors can be ordered as listed in the following table.

115V customers: If you plan to use the 1100W power supply with a low-range (100-127V) power source, select a power cable that is rated above 10A. Power cables that are rated at 10A or below are not supported with low-range power.

Table 77. Power cords
Market/region Part number Feature code Description Top Choice
Express
Rack cables - C13 to C14
Worldwide 00Y3043 A4VP 1.0m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08367 B0N5 1.0m, 13A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 39Y7937 6201 1.5m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08368 B0N6 1.5m, 13A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08365 B0N4 2.0m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08369 6570 2.0m, 13A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08366 6311 2.8m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08370 6400 2.8m, 13A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 39Y7932 6263 4.3m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord TCE
Worldwide 4L67A08371 6583 4.3m, 13A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Rack Power Cable TCE
Rack cables for India - C13 to C14
India 4L67B10326 CC6R 2.0m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord (India) Not TCE
India 4L67B10327 CC6S 2.8m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord (India) TCE
India 4L67B10328 CC6T 4.3m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to C14 Jumper Cord (India) Not TCE
Rack cables - C13 to C20
Worldwide 39Y7938 6204 2.8m, 10A/100-250V, C13 to IEC 320-C20 Rack Power Cable TCE
Rack cables - C13 to C20 (Y-cable)
Worldwide 47C2491 A3SW 1.2m, 16A/100-250V, 2 Short C13s to Short C20 Rack Power Cable Not TCE
Worldwide 47C2492 A3SX 2.5m, 16A/100-250V, 2 Long C13s to Short C20 Rack Power Cable Not TCE
Worldwide 47C2493 A3SY 2.8m, 16A/100-250V, 2 Short C13s to Long C20 Rack Power Cable Not TCE
Worldwide 47C2494 A3SZ 4.1m, 16A/100-250V, 2 Long C13s to Long C20 Rack Power Cable Not TCE
Line cords
Argentina 39Y7930 6222 2.8m, 10A/250V, C13 to IRAM 2073 (Argentina) Line Cord TCE
Argentina 81Y2384 6492 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/IRAM 2073 (Argentina) Line Cord TCE
Australia/NZ 39Y7924 6211 Australia/NZ 10A line C13 to SAA-AS C112 (2.8M) TCE
Australia/NZ 81Y2383 6574 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/AS/NZS 3112/2000 (Australia) Line Cord TCE
Brazil 69Y1988 6532 2.8m, 10A/250V, C13 to NBR 14136 (Brazil) Line Cord TCE
Brazil 81Y2387 6404 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/NBR 14136 (Brazil) Line Cord TCE
China 39Y7928 6210 2.8m, 10A/220V, C13 to GB 2099.1 (China) Line Cord Not TCE
China 81Y2378 6580 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/GB2099.1 (China) Line Cord Not TCE
Europe 39Y7917 6212 European 10A line C13 to CEE 7/7 (2.8M) TCE
Europe 81Y2376 6572 4.3m,10A/230V, C13 to CEE7-VII (Europe) Line Cord Not TCE
India 39Y7927 6269 2.8m, 6A Line C13 to Fig 68 (India) Line Cord TCE
India 81Y2386 6567 4.3m, 10A/250V, C13 to IS 6538 (India) Line Cord TCE
Israel 39Y7920 6218 Israel 10A line C13 to SI 32 (2.8M) TCE
Italy/Chile 39Y7921 6217 Italy 10A line C13 to CEE 7/7 (2.8M) TCE
Italy/Chile 81Y2380 6493 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/CEI 23-16 (IT) Line cord TCE
Japan 46M2593 A1RE Japan 12A/125V C13 to JIS C-8303 2.8m line cord TCE
Japan 39Y7926 6335 4.3m, 12A/100V, C13 to JIS C-8303 (Japan) Line Cord TCE
South Africa 39Y7922 6214 South Africa 10A line C13 to SABS 164/1 (2.8M) TCE
South Africa 81Y2379 6576 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/SANS 164-1 (South Africa) Line Cord TCE
South Korea 39Y7925 6219 Korea 7A line C13 to KETI 15A/250V (2.8M) TCE
South Korea 81Y2385 6494 4.3m, 12A/250V C13/KSC 8305 (Korea) Line Cord TCE
Switzerland 39Y7919 6216 Switzerland 10A line C13 to SEV 1011 (2.8M) TCE
Switzerland 81Y2390 6578 4.3m,10A/250V, C13/SEV 1011 (Switzerland)Line Cord Not TCE
Taiwan 23R7158 6386 Line cord - 2.8m, 10A/125V, C13 to CNS 10917-3 (Taiwan) TCE
Taiwan 81Y2375 6317 Taiwan 10A/250V C13/CNS 10917 2.8m line cord TCE
Taiwan 81Y2374 6402 2.8m, 13A/125V, C13 to CNS 60799 (Taiwan) Line Cord TCE
Taiwan 4L67A08363 AX8B 4.3m, 10A/125V, C13 to CNS 10917 (Taiwan) Line Cord TCE
Taiwan 81Y2389 6531 4.3m, 10A/250V, C13/CNS 10917 (Taiwan) Line Cord TCE
Taiwan 81Y2388 6530 Taiwan 13A/125V C13/CNS 10917 4.3m line cord TCE
UK 39Y7923 6215 United Kingdom 10A line C13 to BS 1363 (2.8M) TCE
UK 81Y2377 6577 4.3m,10A/230V, C13 to BS 1363/A (UK) Line Cord TCE
USA/Canada 90Y3016 6313 2.8m, 10A/120V, C13 to NEMA 5-15P (US) Line Cord TCE
USA/Canada 46M2592 A1RF 10A/250V C13 to NEMA 6-15P 2.8m line cord TCE
USA/Canada 00WH545 6401 2.8m, 13A/120V, C13 to NEMA 5-15P (US) Line Cord TCE
USA/Canada 4L67A08359 6370 4.3M, 10A/125V, C13 to NEMA 5-15P (US) Line Cord TCE
USA/Canada 4L67A08361 6373 4.3m, 10A/250V, C13 to NEMA 6-15P (US) Line Cord TCE
USA/Canada 4L67A08360 AX8A 4.3m, 13A/125V, C13 to NEMA 5-15P (US) Line Cord TCE

Power cords (C19 connectors)

Line cords and rack power cables with C19 connectors can be ordered as listed in the following table.

Table 78. Power cords (C19 connectors)
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice
Express
C19 to C20 Rack cables
4L67A86677 BV8K 0.5m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord Not TCE
4L67A86678 B4L0 1.0m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord Not TCE
4L67A86679 B4L1 1.5m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord TCE
4L67A86680 B4L2 2.0m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord Not TCE
39Y7916 6252 2.5m, 16A/100-240V, C19 to IEC 320-C20 Rack Power Cable TCE
4L67A86681 B4L3 4.3m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord Not TCE
C19 to C20 Rack cables for India
4L67B10323 CC6N 2.0m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord (India) Not TCE
4L67B10324 CC6P 2.8m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord (India) Not TCE
4L67B10325 CC6Q 4.3m, 16A/100-250V, C19 to C20 Jumper Cord (India) Not TCE
C19 Line cords
40K9777 6525 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - Argentina Not TCE
40K9773 6521 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - Australia/NZ Not TCE
40K9775 6523 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - Brazil Not TCE
40K9774 6522 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - China Not TCE
40K9766 6514 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - Europe Not TCE
40K9776 6524 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - India Not TCE
40K9768 6516 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - Italy Not TCE
41Y9231 6289 4.3m, 15A/250V, C19 to KSC 8305 (S. Korea) Line Cord TCE
41Y9230 6287 4.3m, 16A/250V, C19 to CNS 10917-3 (Taiwan) Line Cord Not TCE
40K9767 6515 C19 4.3 meter Line Cord - UK Not TCE
40K9772 6275 C19 4.3m cord - NEMA L6-20P Not TCE
00D7197 A1NV 4.3m, 15A/250V, C19 to NEMA 6-15P (US) Line Cord Not TCE

-48V DC power cord

For the -48V DC Power Supply, the following power cable is supported.

Table 79. -48V DC power cable
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
4X97A59831 BE4V 2.5m, -48VDC Interconnecting Cable Not TCE

Systems management

The SR655 V3 contains an integrated service processor, XClarity Controller 2 (XCC), which provides advanced control, monitoring, and alerting functions. The XCC2 is based on the AST2600 baseboard management controller (BMC) using a dual-core ARM Cortex A7 32-bit RISC service processor running at 1.2 GHz.

Topics in this section:

  • System I/O Board
  • Local management
  • System status with XClarity One Mobile
  • Remote management
  • XCC2 Platinum
  • Lenovo XClarity Provisioning Manager
  • Lenovo XClarity One
  • Lenovo XClarity Administrator
  • Lenovo XClarity Integrators
  • Lenovo XClarity Essentials
  • Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager
  • Lenovo Capacity Planner

System I/O Board

The SR655 V3 implements a separate System I/O Board that connects to the Processor Board. The location of the System I/O Board is shown in the Components and connectors section. The System I/O Board contains all the connectors visible at the rear of the server as shown in the following figure.

System I/O Board
Figure 21. System I/O Board

The board also has the following components:

  • XClarity Controller 2, implemented using the ASPEED AST2600 baseboard management controller (BMC).
  • Root of Trust (RoT) module - a daughter card that implements Platform Firmware Resiliency (PFR) hardware Root of Trust (RoT) which enables the server to be NIST SP800-193 compliant. For more details about PFR, see the Security section.
  • Connector to enable an additional redundant Ethernet connection to the XCC2 controller. The connector is used in conjunction with the ThinkSystem V3 Management NIC Adapter Kit (4XC7A85319). For details, see the Remote management section.
  • Internal USB port - to allow the booting of an operating system from a USB key. The VMware ESXi preloads use this port for example. Preloads are described in the Operating system support section.
  • MicroSD card port to enable the use of a MicroSD card for additional storage for use with the XCC2 controller. XCC2 can use the storage as a Remote Disc on Card (RDOC) device (up to 4GB of storage). It can also be used to store firmware updates (including N-1 firmware history) for ease of deployment.

    Tip: Without a MicroSD card installed, the XCC2 controller will have 100MB of available RDOC storage.

Ordering information for the supported USB drive and Micro SD card are listed in the following table.

Table 81. Media for use with the System I/O Board
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice
Express
4X77A77065 BNWN ThinkSystem USB 32GB USB 3.0 Flash Drive Not TCE
4X77A77064 BNWP ThinkSystem MicroSD 32GB Class 10 Flash Memory Card Not TCE
4X77A92672 C0BC ThinkSystem MicroSD 64GB Class 10 Flash Memory Card Not TCE

Local management

The SR655 V3 offers a front operator panel with key LED status indicators, as shown in the following figure.

Tip: The Network LED only shows network activity of the installed OCP network adapter.

SR655 V3 front controls
Figure 22. Front operator controls are on the left and right side of the server

Light path diagnostics

The server offers light path diagnostics. If an environmental condition exceeds a threshold or if a system component fails, XCC lights LEDs inside the server to help you diagnose the problem and find the failing part. The server has fault LEDs next to the following components:

  • Each memory DIMM
  • Each drive bay
  • Each power supply

Front VGA and External Diagnostics ports

The VGA port at the rear of the server is included in all models, however the VGA port at the front of the server is optional. When the front VGA is in use, the rear VGA port is automatically disabled.

Also optional is the External Diagnostics port which enables the use of the External Diagnostics Handset, described in the next section.

To configure either the VGA port or the External Diagnostics port at the front of the server, select one of the following feature codes when configuring the server.

Table 82. Front VGA port
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice
Express		 Front
VGA port		 External
diagnostics
port
CTO only BQQ2 ThinkSystem 2U V3 EIA Latch Standard TCE No No
4XH7A86164 BQQ1 ThinkSystem V3 2U EIA Latch with VGA & External Diagnostics Ports TCE Included Included
4XH7A86816 BQQ4 ThinkSystem V3 2U EIA Latch with External Diagnostics Port Not TCE No Included
4XH7A86817 BQQ3 ThinkSystem V3 2U EIA Latch with VGA Port TCE Included No

External Diagnostics Handset

The SR655 V3 optionally has a port to connect an External Diagnostics Handset as described in the preceding section. The External Diagnostics Handset has the same functions as the Integrated Diagnostics Panel but has the advantages of not consuming space on the front of the server plus it can be shared among many servers in your data center. The handset has a magnet on the back of it to allow you to easily mount it on a convenient place on any rack cabinet.

External management LCD
Figure 23. External Diagnostics Handset

Ordering information for the External Diagnostics Handset with is listed in the following table.

Table 83. External Diagnostics Handset ordering information
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
4TA7A64874 BEUX ThinkSystem External Diagnostics Handset Not TCE

Integrated Diagnostics Panel for 8x 2.5-inch and 16x 2.5-inch drive bay configurations

For configurations with 8x 2.5-inch or 16x 2.5-inch drive bays at the front, the server can optionally be configured to have a pull-out Integrated Diagnostics Panel. The following figure shows the standard (fixed) operator panel and the optional Integrated Diagnostics Panel.

Operator panel choices for the 8x 2.5-inch and 16x 2.5-inch drive bay configurations
Figure 24. Operator panel choices for the 8x 2.5-inch drive bay configuration

The Integrated Diagnostics Panel allows quick access to system status, firmware, network, and health information. The LCD display on the panel and the function buttons give you access to the following information:

  • Active alerts
  • Status Dashboard
  • System VPD: machine type & mode, serial number, UUID string
  • System firmware levels: UEFI and XCC firmware
  • XCC network information: hostname, MAC address, IP address, DNS addresses
  • Environmental data: Ambient temperature, CPU temperature, AC input voltage, estimated power consumption
  • Active XCC sessions
  • System reset action

The Integrated Diagnostics Panel can be configured as listed in the following table. It is only available configure-to-order (CTO); not available as a field upgrade.

Table 84. Ordering information for the Integrated Diagnostics Panel
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
CTO only BMJA ThinkSystem 2U 16x2.5" Front Operator Panel v2 TCE

Information pull-out tab

The front of the server also houses an information pull-out tab (also known as the network access tag). See Figure 2 for the location. A label on the tab shows the network information (MAC address and other data) to remotely access the service processor.

System status with XClarity One Mobile

The XClarity One Mobile app includes a tethering function where you can connect your Android or iOS device to the server via USB to see the status of the server.

Download the XClarity One Mobile app from these sites:

  • Google Play Store
  • Apple App Store

The steps to connect the mobile device to the server are as follows:

  1. Enable USB Management on the server, by holding down the ID button for 3 seconds (or pressing the dedicated USB management button if one is present)
  2. Connect the mobile device via a USB cable to the server's USB port with the management symbol USB Management symbol
  3. In iOS or Android settings, enable Personal Hotspot or USB Tethering
  4. Launch the Lenovo XClarity Mobile app

Once connected you can see the following information:

  • Server status including error logs (read only, no login required)
  • Server management functions (XClarity login credentials required)

Remote management

The server offers a dedicated RJ45 port at the rear of the server for remote management via the XClarity Controller management processor. The port supports 10/100/1000 Mbps speeds.

Remote server management is provided through industry-standard interfaces:

  • Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Version 2.0
  • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Version 3 (no SET commands; no SNMP v1)
  • Common Information Model (CIM-XML)
  • Representational State Transfer (REST) support
  • Redfish support (DMTF compliant)
  • Web browser - HTML 5-based browser interface (Java and ActiveX not required) using a responsive design (content optimized for device being used - laptop, tablet, phone) with NLS support

The SR655 V3 also supports the use of an OCP adapter that provides an additional redundant Ethernet connection to the XCC2 controller. Ordering information is listed in the following table.

Table 85. Redundant System Management Port Adapter
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description Top Choice
Express		 Maximum
quantity
4XC7A85319 BTMQ ThinkSystem V3 Management NIC Adapter Kit Not TCE 1

The use of this adapter allows concurrent remote access using both the connection on the adapter and the onboard RJ45 remote management port provided by the server. The adapter and onboard port have separate IP addresses.

Configuration rules:

  • The Redundant System Management Port Adapter is installed in the OCP adapter slot at the rear of the server and is mutually exclusive with any OCP network adapter.
  • It is not supported installed in the front OCP slot (if the front OCP slot is configured)
  • If the Redundant System Management Port Adapter is installed in the rear slot, then the front OCP slot (if configured) cannot be used.

The following figure shows the server with the Redundant System Management Port Adapter installed in the OCP slot.

SR655 V3 with the Redundant System Management Port Adapter installed
Figure 25. SR655 V3 with the Redundant System Management Port Adapter installed

IPMI via the Ethernet port (IPMI over LAN) is supported, however it is disabled by default. For CTO orders you can specify whether you want to the feature enabled or disabled in the factory, using the feature codes listed in the following table.

Table 86. IPMI-over-LAN settings
Feature code Description Top Choice Express
B7XZ Disable IPMI-over-LAN (default) TCE
B7Y0 Enable IPMI-over-LAN TCE

XCC2 Platinum

The XCC2 service processor in the SR655 V3 supports an upgrade to the Platinum level of features. Compared to the XCC functions of ThinkSystem V2 and earlier systems, Platinum adds the same features as Enterprise and Advanced levels in ThinkSystem V2, plus additional features.

XCC2 Platinum adds the following Enterprise and Advanced functions:

  • Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600x1200 at 75 Hz with up to 23 bits per pixel, regardless of the system state
  • Remotely accessing the server using the keyboard and mouse from a remote client
  • International keyboard mapping support
  • Syslog alerting
  • Redirecting serial console via SSH
  • Component replacement log (Maintenance History log)
  • Access restriction (IP address blocking)
  • Lenovo SED security key management
  • Displaying graphics for real-time and historical power usage data and temperature
  • Boot video capture and crash video capture
  • Virtual console collaboration - Ability for up to 6 remote users to be log into the remote session simultaneously
  • Remote console Java client
  • Mapping the ISO and image files located on the local client as virtual drives for use by the server
  • Mounting the remote ISO and image files via HTTPS, SFTP, CIFS, and NFS
  • System utilization data and graphic view
  • Single sign on with Lenovo XClarity Administrator
  • Update firmware from a repository
  • License for XClarity Energy Manager

Note: The SR655 V3 does not support Power capping.

XCC2 Platinum also adds the following features that are new to XCC2:

  • System Guard - Monitor hardware inventory for unexpected component changes, and simply log the event or prevent booting
  • Enterprise Strict Security mode - Enforces CNSA 1.0 level security
  • Neighbor Group - Enables administrators to manage and synchronize configurations and firmware level across multiple servers

Ordering information is listed in the following table. XCC2 Platinum is a software license upgrade - no additional hardware is required.

Table 87. XCC2 Platinum license upgrade
Part number Feature code Description
7S0X000DWW S91X Lenovo XClarity XCC2 Platinum Upgrade
7S0X000KWW SBCV Lenovo XClarity Controller 2 (XCC2) Platinum Upgrade

With XCC2 Platinum, for CTO orders, you can request that System Guard be enabled in the factory and the first configuration snapshot be recorded. To add this to an order, select feature code listed in the following table. The selection is made in the Security tab of the DCSC configurator.

Table 88. Enable System Guard in the factory (CTO orders)
Feature code Description Top Choice Express
BUT2 Install System Guard TCE

For more information about System Guard, see https://pubs.lenovo.com/xcc2/NN1ia_c_systemguard

Lenovo XClarity Provisioning Manager

Lenovo XClarity Provisioning Manager (LXPM) is a UEFI-based application embedded in ThinkSystem servers and accessible via the F1 key during system boot.

LXPM provides the following functions:

  • Graphical UEFI Setup
  • System inventory information and VPD update
  • System firmware updates (UEFI and XCC)
  • RAID setup wizard
  • OS installation wizard (including unattended OS installation)
  • Diagnostics functions

Lenovo XClarity One

Lenovo XClarity One is a cloud-native unified Management-as-a-Service (MaaS) platform, engineered to modernize IT infrastructure. .

XClarity One is the next milestone in Lenovo’s portfolio of systems management products. Now you can leverage the benefits of a true next-generation platform for the deployment, management, and maintenance of your infrastructure through a single, centralized platform that delivers a consistent user experience across all Lenovo products.

XClarity One's primary architectural value is divided into three key areas:

  • How it predicts issues (AI/Analytics)
  • How it securely connects (Secure Management Hubs),
  • How it actually configures the hardware at scale (Template-Driven Lifecycle Control)

AI-powered Automation

XClarity One harnesses the power of AI and predictive analytics to enhance the performance and reliability of your infrastructure with proactive protection.

  • AI-Powered Predictive Failure Analytics - XC1 utilizes machine learning infrastructure to look at live device telemetries. The platform securely collects memory-diagnostic logs and pushes them into an active MPFA AI model infrastructure to analyze health patterns and predict probable hardware degradation before it manifests as a hard failure.
  • AI-Powered Call-Home - A Call-Home serviceable event opens a support ticket automatically, leveraging AI technology (in the case of MPFA) for problem determination and fast resolution automatically dispatching parts and services, reducing service costs and minimizing downtime.

Secure Management Hub

Lenovo’s proprietary Management Hub is an on-premises virtual appliance that acts as the bridge between your infrastructure and the cloud.

  • On-Premises Security with Cloud Flexibility - your infrastructure has no direct connection to the cloud, greatly reducing your attack surface from external threats while still having the deployment benefits, flexibility, and scalability of a cloud solution.
  • Authentication and Authorization - built on a Zero Trust Architecture and requiring OTP Application authentication for all users to handle the support of all customers’ servers and client devices. Role-based access controls help define and restrict permissions based on user roles.

Template-Driven Lifecycle Control

Lenovo’s unified management model eliminates fragmented server administration, allowing you to deploy, track, and maintain your entire infrastructure fleet from a single cloud-native dashboard.

  • Automated Configuration and Compliance: Leverage scalable, repeatable device templates to rapidly deploy firmware updates, operating systems, and core baseboard management controller (BMC/UEFI) simultaneously across multiple sites. XClarity One continuously analyzes hardware compliance, shifting out-of-compliance systems to a critical status until a template re-deployment aligns them back to corporate standards.
  • Global Asset Visibility and Fleet Telemetry: Centralize real-time tracking of component health, warranty status, and comprehensive hardware inventories. The platform aggregates live usage data, including memory allocation, power consumption, and processor thermal trends, giving you total operational awareness whether a server resides in a centralized data center or a remote edge environment.

Centralized management via Lenovo XClarity One can be integrated into your environment as an optional component. License information for XClarity One is listed in the following table.

Table 89. XClarity One license information
Part number Feature code Description
Starter licenses (limited to 10 devices per organization)
7S0X001EWW SF8Y XClarity One - Starter, Per Endpoint w/1 Yr SW S&S
7S0X001FWW SF8Z XClarity One - Starter, Per Endpoint w/2 Yr SW S&S
7S0X001GWW SF90 XClarity One - Starter, Per Endpoint w/3 Yr SW S&S
7S0X001HWW SF91 XClarity One - Starter, Per Endpoint w/4 Yr SW S&S
7S0X001JWW SF92 XClarity One - Starter, Per Endpoint w/5 Yr SW S&S
Standard licenses
7S0X000LWW SCJC XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/1 Yr SW S&S
7S0X001CWW SENW XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/2Yr SW S&S
7S0X000MWW SCJD XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/3 Yr SW S&S
7S0X001DWW SENX XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/4Yr SW S&S
7S0X000NWW SCJE XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/5 Yr SW S&S
7S0X000VWW SFQ1 XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/6Yr SW S&S
7S0X000WWW SFQ2 XClarity One - Standard, Per Endpoint w/7Yr SW S&S

Licensing notes:

  • One license is needed per physical managed device.
  • Starter license is functionally identical to Standard license but is limited to 10 devices per organization maximum.

For more information, see these resources:

  • Lenovo XClarity One datasheet:
    https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/ds0188-lenovo-xclarity-one
  • Lenovo XClarity One product guide:
    https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1992-lenovo-xclarity-one
  • Migrating to Lenovo XClarity One: An Overview:
    https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp2429-migrating-to-lenovo-xclarity-one-an-overview

Lenovo XClarity Administrator

Lenovo XClarity Administrator is a centralized resource management solution designed to reduce complexity, speed response, and enhance the availability of Lenovo systems and solutions. It provides agent-free hardware management for ThinkSystem servers. The administration dashboard is based on HTML 5 and allows fast location of resources so tasks can be run quickly.

Because Lenovo XClarity Administrator does not require any agent software to be installed on the managed endpoints, there are no CPU cycles spent on agent execution, and no memory is used, which means that up to 1GB of RAM and 1 - 2% CPU usage is saved, compared to a typical managed system where an agent is required.

Lenovo XClarity Administrator is an optional software component for the SR655 V3. The software can be downloaded and used at no charge to discover and monitor the SR655 V3 and to manage firmware upgrades.

If software support is required for Lenovo XClarity Administrator, or premium features such as configuration management and operating system deployment are required, Lenovo XClarity Pro software subscription should be ordered. Lenovo XClarity Pro is licensed on a per managed system basis, that is, each managed Lenovo system requires a license.

The following table lists the Lenovo XClarity software license options.

Table 90. Lenovo XClarity Pro ordering information
Part number Feature code Description
00MT201 1339 Lenovo XClarity Pro, per Managed Endpoint w/1 Yr SW S&S
00MT202 1340 Lenovo XClarity Pro, per Managed Endpoint w/3 Yr SW S&S
00MT203 1341 Lenovo XClarity Pro, per Managed Endpoint w/5 Yr SW S&S
7S0X000HWW SAYV Lenovo XClarity Pro, per Managed Endpoint w/6 Yr SW S&S
7S0X000JWW SAYW Lenovo XClarity Pro, per Managed Endpoint w/7 Yr SW S&S

Lenovo XClarity Administrator offers the following standard features that are available at no charge:

  • Auto-discovery and monitoring of Lenovo systems
  • Firmware updates and compliance enforcement
  • External alerts and notifications via SNMP traps, syslog remote logging, and e-mail
  • Secure connections to managed endpoints
  • NIST 800-131A or FIPS 140-3 compliant cryptographic standards between the management solution and managed endpoints
  • Integration into existing higher-level management systems such as cloud automation and orchestration tools through REST APIs, providing extensive external visibility and control over hardware resources
  • An intuitive, easy-to-use GUI
  • Scripting with Windows PowerShell, providing command-line visibility and control over hardware resources

Lenovo XClarity Administrator offers the following premium features that require an optional Pro license:

  • Pattern-based configuration management that allows to define configurations once and apply repeatedly without errors when deploying new servers or redeploying existing servers without disrupting the fabric
  • Bare-metal deployment of operating systems and hypervisors to streamline infrastructure provisioning

For more information, refer to the Lenovo XClarity Administrator Product Guide:
http://lenovopress.com/tips1200

Lenovo XClarity Integrators

Lenovo also offers software plug-in modules, Lenovo XClarity Integrators, to manage physical infrastructure from leading external virtualization management software tools including those from Microsoft and VMware.

These integrators are offered at no charge, however if software support is required, a Lenovo XClarity Pro software subscription license should be ordered.

Lenovo XClarity Integrators offer the following additional features:

  • Ability to discover, manage, and monitor Lenovo server hardware from VMware vCenter or Microsoft System Center
  • Deployment of firmware updates and configuration patterns to Lenovo x86 rack servers and Flex System from the virtualization management tool
  • Non-disruptive server maintenance in clustered environments that reduces workload downtime by dynamically migrating workloads from affected hosts during rolling server updates or reboots
  • Greater service level uptime and assurance in clustered environments during unplanned hardware events by dynamically triggering workload migration from impacted hosts when impending hardware failures are predicted

For more information about all the available Lenovo XClarity Integrators, see the Lenovo XClarity Administrator Product Guide: https://lenovopress.com/tips1200-lenovo-xclarity-administrator

Lenovo XClarity Essentials

Lenovo offers the following XClarity Essentials software tools that can help you set up, use, and maintain the server at no additional cost:

  • Lenovo Essentials OneCLI

    OneCLI is a collection of server management tools that uses a command line interface program to manage firmware, hardware, and operating systems. It provides functions to collect full system health information (including health status), configure system settings, and update system firmware and drivers.

  • Lenovo Essentials UpdateXpress

    The UpdateXpress tool is a standalone GUI application for firmware and device driver updates that enables you to maintain your server firmware and device drivers up-to-date and help you avoid unnecessary server outages. The tool acquires and deploys individual updates and UpdateXpress System Packs (UXSPs) which are integration-tested bundles.

  • Lenovo Essentials Bootable Media Creator

    The Bootable Media Creator (BOMC) tool is used to create bootable media for offline firmware update.

For more information and downloads, visit the Lenovo XClarity Essentials web page:
http://support.lenovo.com/us/en/documents/LNVO-center

Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager

Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager (LXEM) is a power and temperature management solution for data centers. It is an agent-free, web-based console that enables you to monitor and manage power consumption and temperature in your data center through the management console.

LXEM is a licensed product. A single-node LXEM license is included with the XClarity Controller Platinum upgrade as described in the XCC2 Platinum section. If your server does not have the XCC Platinum upgrade, Energy Manager licenses can be ordered as shown in the following table.

Table 91. Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager
Part number Description
4L40E51621 Lenovo XClarity Energy Manager Node License (1 license needed per server)

Note: The SR655 V3 does not support the following Energy Manager functions:

  • Power capping
  • Policy-based management

For more information about XClarity Energy Manager, see the following resources:

  • Lenovo Support page:
    https://datacentersupport.lenovo.com/us/en/solutions/lnvo-lxem
  • User Guide for XClarity Energy Manager:
    https://pubs.lenovo.com/lxem/

Lenovo Capacity Planner

Lenovo Capacity Planner is a power consumption evaluation tool that enhances data center planning by enabling IT administrators and pre-sales professionals to understand various power characteristics of racks, servers, and other devices. Capacity Planner can dynamically calculate the power consumption, current, British Thermal Unit (BTU), and volt-ampere (VA) rating at the rack level, improving the planning efficiency for large scale deployments.

For more information, refer to the Capacity Planner web page:
http://datacentersupport.lenovo.com/us/en/solutions/lnvo-lcp

Security

Topics in this section:

  • Security features
  • Platform Firmware Resiliency - Lenovo ThinkShield
  • Security standards

Security features

The SR655 V3 server offers the following electronic security features:

  • Secure Boot function of the AMD EPYC processor
  • Support for Platform Firmware Resiliency (PFR) hardware Root of Trust (RoT) - see the Platform Firmware Resiliency section
  • Firmware signature processes compliant with FIPS and NIST requirements
  • System Guard (part of XCC Platinum) - Proactive monitoring of hardware inventory for unexpected component changes
  • Administrator and power-on password
  • Integrated Trusted Platform Module (TPM) supporting TPM 2.0
  • Optional Nationz TPM 2.0, available only in China (CTO only)
  • Self-encrypting drives (SEDs) with support for enterprise key managers - see the SED encryption key management section

The server is NIST SP 800-147B compliant.

The SR655 V3 server also offers the following physical security features:

  • Optional chassis intrusion switch
  • Optional lockable front security bezel

The optional lockable front security bezel is shown in the following figure and includes a key that enables you to secure the bezel over the drives and system controls thereby reducing the chance of unauthorized or accidental access to the server.

Front PCIe slots: The use of the security bezel is not supported when the server has front PCIe slots.

Lockable front security bezel
Figure 26. Lockable front security bezel

The dimensions of the security bezel are:

  • Width: 437 mm (17.2 in.)
  • Height: 87 mm (3.4 in.)
  • Width: 23 mm (0.9 in.)

The following table lists the security options for the SR655 V3.

Table 92. Security features
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
4X97A82927 BAJJ ThinkSystem SR650 V3/SR655 V3 Intrusion Cable TCE
4XH7A09886 B8M2 ThinkSystem V2 2U Security Bezel Option Kit Not TCE
4XH7A90300 BXBQ ThinkSystem V3 2U Security Bezel Option Kit TCE

Tip: The only difference between security bezels 4XH7A09886 and 4XH7A90300 is the Lenovo logo: On 4XH7A09886, the logo is made from plastic; on 4XH7A90300, the logo is made from aluminum alloy.

For customers in China, a Nationz TPM 2.0 module is optional for CTO orders, as listed in the following table.

Table 93. Nationz TPM 2.0 module for customers in PRC
Part number Feature code Description
CTO only BPKS ThinkSystem PRC NationZ TPM 2.0

Platform Firmware Resiliency - Lenovo ThinkShield

Lenovo's ThinkShield Security is a transparent and comprehensive approach to security that extends to all dimensions of our data center products: from development, to supply chain, and through the entire product lifecycle.

The ThinkSystem SR655 V3 includes Platform Firmware Resiliency (PFR) hardware Root of Trust (RoT) which enables the system to be NIST SP800-193 compliant. This offering further enhances key platform subsystem protections against unauthorized firmware updates and corruption, to restore firmware to an integral state, and to closely monitor firmware for possible compromise from cyber-attacks.

PFR operates upon the following server components:

  • UEFI image – the low-level server firmware that connects the operating system to the server hardware
  • XCC image – the management “engine” software that controls and reports on the server status separate from the server operating system
  • FPGA image – the code that runs the server’s lowest level hardware controller on the motherboard

The Lenovo Platform Root of Trust Hardware performs the following three main functions:

  • Detection – Measures the firmware and updates for authenticity
  • Recovery – Recovers a corrupted image to a known-safe image
  • Protection – Monitors the system to ensure the known-good firmware is not maliciously written

These enhanced protection capabilities are implemented using a dedicated, discrete security processor whose implementation has been rigorously validated by leading third-party security firms. Security evaluation results and design details are available for customer review – providing unprecedented transparency and assurance.

The SR655 V3 includes support for Secure Boot, a UEFI firmware security feature developed by the UEFI Consortium that ensures only immutable and signed software are loaded during the boot time. The use of Secure Boot helps prevent malicious code from being loaded and helps prevent attacks, such as the installation of rootkits. Lenovo offers the capability to enable secure boot in the factory, to ensure end-to-end protection. Alternatively, Secure Boot can be left disabled in the factory, allowing the customer to enable it themselves at a later point, if desired.

The following table lists the relevant feature code(s).

Table 94. Secure Boot options
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express Purpose
CTO only BPKQ TPM 2.0 with Secure Boot TCE Configure the system in the factory with Secure Boot enabled.
CTO only BPKR TPM 2.0 TCE Configure the system without Secure Boot enabled. Customers can enable Secure Boot later if desired.

Tip: If Secure Boot is not enabled in the factory, it can be enabled later by the customer. However once Secure Boot is enabled, it cannot be disabled.

Security standards

The SR655 V3 supports the following security standards and capabilities:

  • Industry Standard Security Capabilities
    • AMD CPU Enablement
      • AES-NI (Advanced Encryption Standard New Instructions)
      • GMET (Guest Mode Execute Trap)
      • Hardware-based side channel attack resilience enhancements
      • NX (No eXecute)
      • PSB (Platform Secure Boot)
      • Shadow Stack
      • SEV (Secure Encrypted Virtualization)
      • SEV-ES (Encrypted State register encryption)
      • SEV-SNP (Secure Nested Paging)
      • TSME (Transparent Secure Memory Encryption)
      • SVM (Secure Virtual Machine)
      • UMIP (User Mode Instruction Prevention)
    • Microsoft Windows Security Enablement
      • Credential Guard
      • Device Guard
      • Host Guardian Service
    • TPM 2.0 (Trusted Platform Module 2.0)
    • UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) Forum Secure Boot
  • Hardware Root of Trust and Security
    • Independent security subsystem providing platform-wide NIST SP800-193 compliant Platform Firmware Resilience (PFR)
    • Host domain RoT supplemented by AMD Platform Secure Boot (PSB)
    • Management domain RoT provided by the Secure Boot feature of the AST2600 Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)
  • Platform Security
    • Boot and run-time firmware integrity monitoring with rollback to known-good firmware (e.g., “self-healing”)
    • Non-volatile storage bus security monitoring and filtering
    • Resilient firmware implementation, such as to detect and defeat unauthorized flash writes or SMM (System Management Mode) memory incursions
    • Patented IPMI KCS channel privileged access authorization (USPTO Patent# 11,256,810)
    • Host and management domain authorization, including integration with CyberArk for enterprise password management
    • KMIP (Key Management Interoperability Protocol) compliant, including support for IBM SKLM and Thales KeySecure
    • Reduced “out of box” attack surface
    • Configurable network services
    • FIPS 140-3 (in progress) validated cryptography for XCC
    • CNSA Suite 1.0 Quantum-resistant cryptography for XCC

    For more information on platform security, see the paper “How to Harden the Security of your ThinkSystem Server and Management Applications” available from https://lenovopress.com/lp1260-how-to-harden-the-security-of-your-thinksystem-server.

  • Standards Compliance and/or Support
    • NIST SP800-131A rev 2 “Transitioning the Use of Cryptographic Algorithms and Key Lengths”
    • NIST SP800-147B “BIOS Protection Guidelines for Servers”
    • NIST SP800-193 “Platform Firmware Resiliency Guidelines”
    • ISO/IEC 11889 “Trusted Platform Module Library”
    • Common Criteria TCG Protection Profile for “PC Client Specific TPM 2.0”
    • European Union Commission Regulation 2019/424 (“ErP Lot 9”) “Ecodesign Requirements for Servers and Data Storage Products” Secure Data Deletion
    • Optional FIPS 140-2 validated Self-Encrypting Disks (SEDs) with external KMIP-based key management
  • Product and Supply Chain Security
    • Suppliers validated through Lenovo’s Trusted Supplier Program
    • Developed in accordance with Lenovo’s Secure Development Lifecycle (LSDL)
    • Continuous firmware security validation through automated testing, including static code analysis, dynamic network and web vulnerability testing, software composition analysis, and subsystem-specific testing, such as UEFI security configuration validation
    • Ongoing security reviews by US-based security experts, with attestation letters available from our third-party security partners
    • Digitally signed firmware, stored and built on US-based infrastructure and signed on US-based Hardware Security Modules (HSMs)
    • TAA (Trade Agreements Act) compliant manufacturing, by default in Mexico for North American markets with additional US and EU manufacturing options
    • US 2019 NDAA (National Defense Authorization Act) Section 889 compliant

Rack installation

The following table lists the rack installation options that are available for the SR655 V3.

Table 95. Rack installation options
Part number Feature Description Top Choice Express
Rail Kits
4XF7A99129 C4TL ThinkSystem Toolless Stab-in Slide Rail Kit V3 TCE
4XF7A99131 C4TN ThinkSystem Toolless Stab-in Slide Rail Kit V3 with 2U CMA TCE
4M17A13564 BK7W ThinkSystem SR250/SR150 Toolless Friction Rail TCE
4M17A11754 B8LA ThinkSystem Toolless Slide Rail Kit v2 TCE
4M17A11756 B91Y ThinkSystem Toolless Slide Rail Kit v2 with 2U CMA TCE
Enhanced Rail Kits for > 34 kg server weight*
4M17A11755 B8LB ThinkSystem Toolless Slide Rail Kit v2 Enhanced Not TCE
4M17A11757 B97N ThinkSystem Toolless Slide Rail Kit v2 Enhanced with 2U CMA TCE
Separate Cable Management Arm
7M27A05698 B135 ThinkSystem 2U CMA Upgrade Kit for Toolless Slide Rail Not TCE

* The Enhanced Slide Rail Kits are used when the server is shipped in a rack and the server is 34 kg or heavier (configuration with 20x 3.5-inch HDDs for example)

For the specification of the rail kits, see the ThinkSystem and ThinkEdge Rail Kit Reference:
https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1838-thinksystem-and-thinkedge-rail-kit-reference#sr655-v3-support=SR655%2520V3

Operating system support

The SR655 V3 with 5th Gen AMD EPYC processors supports the following operating systems:

  • Microsoft Windows 10 (x64)
  • Microsoft Windows 11
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2019
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2022
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2025
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8.10
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.4
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.5
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.6
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.7
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.8
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 10.0
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 10.1
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 10.2
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP6
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP7
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 16
  • Ubuntu 22.04 LTS 64-bit
  • Ubuntu 24.04 LTS 64-bit
  • Ubuntu 26.04 LTS 64-bit
  • VMware ESXi 8.0 U3
  • VMware ESXi 9.0
  • VMware ESXi 9.1

The SR655 V3 with 4th Gen AMD EPYC processors supports the following operating systems:

  • Microsoft Windows 10 (x64)
  • Microsoft Windows 11
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2019
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2022
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2025
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8.6
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8.7
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8.8
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8.9
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8.10
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.0
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.1
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.2
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.3
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.4
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.5
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.6
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.7
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9.8
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 10.0
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 10.1
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux 10.2
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP4
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP5
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP6
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 SP7
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 Xen SP4
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 15 Xen SP5
  • SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 16
  • Ubuntu 20.04 LTS 64-bit
  • Ubuntu 22.04 LTS 64-bit
  • Ubuntu 24.04 LTS 64-bit
  • Ubuntu 26.04 LTS 64-bit
  • VMware ESXi 7.0 U3
  • VMware ESXi 8.0
  • VMware ESXi 8.0 U1
  • VMware ESXi 8.0 U2
  • VMware ESXi 8.0 U3
  • VMware ESXi 9.0
  • VMware ESXi 9.1

For a complete list of supported, certified and tested operating systems, plus additional details and links to relevant web sites, see the Operating System Interoperability Guide:

  • 5th Gen AMD EPYC: https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/osig#servers=sr655-v3-5th-gen-epyc-7d9f-7d9e&support=all
  • 4th Gen AMD EPYC: https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/osig#servers=sr655-v3-4th-gen-epyc-7d9f-7d9e&support=all

For configure-to-order configurations, the SR655 V3 can be preloaded with VMware ESXi. Ordering information is listed in the following table.

Table 96. VMware ESXi preload
Part number Feature code Description Top Choice Express
CTO only B88T VMware ESXi 6.7 U3 (factory installed) Not TCE
CTO only BBZG VMware ESXi 7.0 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only BE5E VMware ESXi 7.0 U1 (Factory Installed) Not TCE
CTO only BHSR VMware ESXi 7.0 U2 (Factory Installed) Not TCE
CTO only BMEY VMware ESXi 7.0 U3 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only BMT5 VMware ESXi 8.0 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only BQ8S VMware ESXi 8.0 U1 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only BYC7 VMware ESXi 8.0 U2 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only BZ97 VMware ESXi 8.0 U3 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only C91V VMware ESXi 9.0 (Factory Installed) TCE
CTO only CHGN VMware ESXi 9.1 (Factory Installed) Not TCE

Configuration rule:

  • An ESXi preload cannot be selected if the configuration includes an NVIDIA GPU (ESXi preload cannot include the NVIDIA driver)

You can download supported VMware vSphere hypervisor images from the following web page and install it using the instructions provided:
https://vmware.lenovo.com/content/custom_iso/

Windows 10 and Windows 11

The SR655 V3 can now run Windows 10 and Windows 11, however only a subset of adapters and drives can be installed. For ease of configuration, additional Base CTO models 7D9ECTO2WW and 7D9FCTO2WW have been created to assist building a configuration that can be used with the client operating systems. See the Models section for details.

The XClarity management toolset is supported with Windows 10 and Windows 11.

Windows client license: A Windows client license for the system cannot be ordered from Lenovo nor can the OS be preloaded on the system in the factory. For the Windows license and for preloads, please contact your Lenovo business partner. A Windows Pro license is required as a qualifying base OS license in order to use a client Volume License offering.

See the part number tables in the following sections to see which adapters are supported with Windows 10 and Windows 11:

  • Controllers for internal storage
  • M.2 adapters
  • Network adapters
  • GPU adapters

GPU recommended: Lenovo recommends that if you plan to install Windows 10 or 11 on this server to run graphics-intensive applications, then you should selected a dedicated graphics adapter (GPU).

The following components are not supported:

  • Fibre Channel adapters
  • InfiniBand and VPI adapters
  • External storage adapters
  • Flash storage adapters

Physical and electrical specifications

The SR655 V3 has the following overall physical dimensions, excluding components that extend outside the standard chassis, such as EIA flanges, front security bezel (if any), and power supply handles:

  • Width: 445 mm (17.5 inches)
  • Height: 87 mm (3.4 inches)
  • Depth: 766 mm (30.1 inches)

The following table lists the detailed dimensions. See the figure below for the definition of each dimension.

Table 97. Detailed dimensions
Dimension Description
482 mm Xa = Width, to the outsides of the front EIA flanges
435 mm Xb = Width, to the rack rail mating surfaces
445 mm Xc = Width, to the outer most chassis body feature
87 mm Ya = Height, from the bottom of chassis to the top of the chassis
698 mm Za = Depth, from the rack flange mating surface to the rearmost I/O port surface
732 mm Zb = Depth, from the rack flange mating surface to the rearmost feature of the chassis body
732 mm (≤1100W)
755 mm (1800W)
781 mm (2400W)		 Zc = Depth, from the rack flange mating surface to the rearmost feature such as power supply handle
34 mm Zd = Depth, from the forwardmost feature on front of EIA flange to the rack flange mating surface
46 mm Ze = Depth, from the front of security bezel (if applicable) or forwardmost feature to the rack flange mating surface

Rack server dimensions
Figure 27. Server dimensions

The shipping (cardboard packaging) dimensions of the SR655 V3 are as follows:

  • Width: 592 mm (23.3 inches)
  • Height: 282 mm (11.1 inches)
  • Depth: 992 mm (39.1 inches)

The server has the following weight:

  • Maximum weight: 38.8 kg (85.5 lb)

Electrical specifications for AC input power supplies:

  • Input voltage:
    • 100 to 127 (nominal) Vac, 50 Hz or 60 Hz
    • 200 to 240 (nominal) Vac, 50 Hz or 60 Hz
    • 180 to 300 Vdc (China only)
  • Inlet current: See the following table.
Table 98. Maximum inlet current
Part number Description 100V AC 200V AC 220V AC 240V DC
AC input power - 80 PLUS Titanium efficiency
4P57A82019 ThinkSystem 750W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v3 No support 4A 3.6A 3.3A
4P57A72666 ThinkSystem 1100W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply No support 5.9A 5.3A 5A
4P57A78359 ThinkSystem 1800W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply No support 9.7A 8.7A 8.3A
4P57A72667 ThinkSystem 2600W 230V Titanium Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v4 No support 13.2A 13A 11.9A
AC input power - 80 PLUS Platinum efficiency
4P57A72670 ThinkSystem 750W 230V/115V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v3 8.4A 4.1A 3.69A 3.5A
4P57A72671 ThinkSystem 1100W 230V/115V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v3 12A 6A 5.4A 5.1A
4P57A78362 ThinkSystem 1800W 230V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply v2 No support 10A 9.1A 9A
4P57A26295 ThinkSystem 2400W 230V Platinum Hot-Swap Gen2 Power Supply No support 14A 12.6A 12A

Electrical specifications for DC input power supply:

  • Input voltage: -48 to -60 Vdc
  • Inlet current (1100W power supply): 26 A

Operating environment

The SR655 V3 server complies with ASHRAE Class A2 specifications with most configurations, and depending on the hardware configuration, also complies with ASHRAE Class A3 and Class A4 specifications.

Depending on the hardware configuration, the SR655 V3 server also complies with ASHRAE Class H1 specification. System performance may be impacted when operating temperature is outside ASHRAE H1 specification.

Topics in this section:

  • Ambient temperature requirements
  • Temperature and humidity
  • Heat output
  • Acoustical noise emissions
  • Shock and vibration
  • Particulate contamination

Ambient temperature requirements

The restrictions to ASHRAE support are as follows:

  • The ambient temperature must be limited to 35°C if the server has any of the following components:
    • Broadcom 57454 10GBASE-T 4-port OCP
    • Broadcom 57416 10GBASE-T 2-port OCP
    • PCIe network interface cards (NICs) at a rate greater than or equal to 100 GB
    • Parts with active optical cable (AOC) and at a rate of 25 GB
  • The ambient temperature must be limited to 30°C if the server has any of the following components:
    • 24 x 2.5" or 12 x 3.5" front bay, middle bay, or rear bay
    • GPU adapters
    • Parts with AOC and at a rate of greater than 25 GB
    • Group E (320W <= cTDP <= 400W) processors
    • 9754/9734/9654(P)/9554(P)/9174F processor in a front 8 x 2.5"/8 x 3.5"/16 x 2.5" standard configuration
  • The ambient temperature must be limited to 25°C if the server has any of the following components:
    • 9754/9734/9654(P)/9554(P)/9174F processor in a front 24 x 2.5"/12 x 3.5" configuration without middle/rear bay
    • 9754/9734/9654(P)/9554(P)/9174F processor in a front 8 x 2.5"/8 x 3.5"/16 x 2.5" + GPU configuration
    • Gen5 7.68 TB or larger capacity NVMe drives in a configuration with middle/rear bay
    • 24 x 2.5" front bay + GPU
    • Group A (240 W < cTDP ≤ 300 W) processor in a configuration with middle/rear bay

Server shutdown: When the ambient temperature is greater than the supported max temperature, the server will shut down (ASHRAE 45°C). The server will not power on again until the ambient temperature falls within the supported temperature range.

For additional information, see the Environmental specifications and Thermal rules sections in the product documentation:
https://pubs.lenovo.com/sr655-v3/server_specifications_environmental
https://pubs.lenovo.com/sr655-v3/thermal_rules

Temperature and humidity

The server is supported in the following environment:

  • Air temperature:
    • Operating:
      • ASHRAE Class A2: 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F); the maximum ambient temperature decreases by 1°C for every 300 m (984 ft) increase in altitude above 900 m (2,953 ft).
      • ASHRAE Class A3: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F); the maximum ambient temperature decreases by 1°C for every 175 m (574 ft) increase in altitude above 900 m (2,953 ft).
      • ASHRAE Class A4: 5°C to 45°C (41°F to 113°F); the maximum ambient temperature decreases by 1°C for every 125 m (410 ft) increase in altitude above 900 m (2,953 ft).
      • ASHRAE Class H1: 5 °C to 25 °C (41 °F to 77 °F); Decrease the maximum ambient temperature by 1°C for every 500 m (1640 ft) increase in altitude above 900 m (2,953 ft).
    • Server off: 5°C to 45°C (41°F to 113°F)
    • Shipment/storage: -40°C to 60°C (-40°F to 140°F)
  • Maximum altitude: 3,050 m (10,000 ft)
  • Relative Humidity (non-condensing):
    • Operating
      • ASHRAE Class A2: 8% to 80%; maximum dew point: 21°C (70°F)
      • ASHRAE Class A3: 8% to 85%; maximum dew point: 24°C (75°F)
      • ASHRAE Class A4: 8% to 90%; maximum dew point: 24°C (75°F)
      • ASHRAE Class H1: 8% to 80%; Maximum dew point: 17°C (63°F)
    • Shipment/storage: 8% to 90%

Heat output

The server generates the following heat:

  • Heat/thermal output:
    • Minimum configuration: 2859 BTU/hr, 837 W
    • Maximum configuration: 11,665 BTU/hr, 3419 W

Acoustical noise emissions

The SR655 V3 has the following acoustic noise emissions declaration:

  • Sound power level (LWAd):
    • Idling: 6.6 Bel (Typical), 7.4 Bel (GPU rich), 7.4 Bel (Storage rich)
    • Operating: 8.1 Bel (Typical), 8.6 Bel (GPU rich), 7.5 Bel (Storage rich)
  • Sound pressure level (LpAm):
    • Idling: 49.9 dBA (Typical), 59.5 dBA (GPU rich), 59.5 dBA (Storage rich)
    • Operating: 65.4 dBA (Typical), 71.2 dBA (GPU rich), 61.3 dBA (Storage rich)

Notes:

  • These sound levels were measured in controlled acoustical environments according to procedures specified by ISO7779 and are reported in accordance with ISO 9296.
  • The declared acoustic sound levels are based on the following configurations, which may change depending on configuration/conditions：
    • Typical: 1x 300W CPU, 12x 64GB RDIMM, 16x 2.5 SAS HDD, RAID 940-8i, Intel E810-DA2 10/25GbE SFP28 2-Port OCP, 2x 1800W PSU
    • GPU rich: 1x 300W CPU, 3x A100-80G GPUs, 12x 64GB RDIMM, 16x 2.5 SAS HDD, RAID 940-16i, Intel E810-DA2 10/25GbE SFP28 2-Port OCP, 2x 2400W PSU
    • Storage rich: 1x 240W CPU, 12x 64GB RDIMM, 12x3.5 SAS HDD, RAID 940-8i, Intel E810-DA2 10/25GbE SFP28 2-Port OCP, 2x 1800W PSU
  • Government regulations (such as those prescribed by OSHA or European Community Directives) may govern noise level exposure in the workplace and may apply to you and your server installation. The actual sound pressure levels in your installation depend upon a variety of factors, including the number of racks in the installation; the size, materials, and configuration of the room; the noise levels from other equipment; the room ambient temperature, and employee's location in relation to the equipment. Further, compliance with such government regulations depends on a variety of additional factors, including the duration of employees' exposure and whether employees wear hearing protection. Lenovo recommends that you consult with qualified experts in this field to determine whether you are in compliance with the applicable regulations.

Shock and vibration

The server has the following vibration and shock limits:

  • Vibration:
    • Operating: 0.21 G rms at 5 Hz to 500 Hz for 15 minutes across 3 axes
    • Non-operating: 1.04 G rms at 2 Hz to 200 Hz for 15 minutes across 6 surfaces
  • Shock:
    • Operating: 15 G for 3 milliseconds in each direction (positive and negative X, Y, and Z axes)
    • Non-operating:
      • 23 kg - 31 kg: 35 G for 152 in./sec velocity change across 6 surfaces (3x GPU config, 2.5” config)
      • 32 kg - 68 kg: 35 G for 136 in./sec velocity change across 6 surfaces (20x 3.5” HDD config)

Particulate contamination

Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as humidity or temperature might damage the system that might cause the system to malfunction or stop working altogether.

The following specifications indicate the limits of particulates that the system can tolerate:

  • Reactive gases:
    • The copper reactivity level shall be less than 200 Angstroms per month (Å/month)
    • The silver reactivity level shall be less than 200 Å/month
  • Airborne particulates:
    • The room air should be continuously filtered with MERV 8 filters.
    • Air entering a data center should be filtered with MERV 11 or preferably MERV 13 filters.
    • The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination should be more than 60% RH
    • Environment must be free of zinc whiskers

For additional information, see the Specifications section of the documentation for the server, available from the Lenovo Documents site, https://pubs.lenovo.com/

Water infrastructure for the Lenovo Neptune Processor DWC Module

The Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module is the liquid-based processor cooling offering for the SR655 V3, as described in the Lenovo Processor Neptune Core Module section.

The open-loop cooling module requires the following water infrastructure components in the rack cabinet and data center:

  • Supported 42U or 48U rack cabinet

    The 42U or 48U Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet (machine types 7D6D or 7D6E) are supported. Two 0U mounting points are required for the water manifolds, at the rear of the rack cabinet, one either side.

    For information about the 42U and 48U Heavy Duty Rack Cabinets, see the product guide:
    https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1498-lenovo-heavy-duty-rack-cabinets

  • 38-port water manifold (machine type 7DE6), installed in the rear of the rack cabinet

    The manifold provides quick-disconnect couplings that each server in the rack are connected to. Ordering information is in the table below.

  • Coolant distribution unit (CDU), either in-rack or in-row

    In-rack CDUs are installed at the bottom of the rack cabinet. The supported in-rack CDU is as follows:

    • Lenovo Neptune DWC RM100 In-Rack CDU; see the RM100 In-Rack Coolant Distribution Unit section

    In-row CDUs are separate cabinets that are typically installed at the end of a row of rack cabinets. Examples of suitable in-row CDUs include (but not limited to):

    • Vertiv XDU450 CDU
    • Vertiv XDU600 CDU
    • Vertiv XDU100 CDU
  • Hose kit to connect to the CDU to the manifold

    Ordering information is in the table below.

The following figure shows the major components of the solution.

Water manifold connections
Figure 28. Water manifold connections

Configuration requirements:

  • Maximum number of SR655 V3 servers supported in a rack:
    • 48U rack: 19 servers
    • 42U rack with in-rack CDU: 18 servers
    • 42U rack without in-rack CDU: 19 servers
  • Inlet water flow rate:
    • 0.5 LPM: Maximum 40°C inlet water temperature
    • 1.0 LPM: Maximum 45°C inlet water temperature
    • 1.5 LPM: Maximum 50°C inlet water temperature
  • Water pressure requirement:
    • Maximum operating node inlet pressure = 43.5 psi (3 bars)

Note: Water quality must be maintained over the lifetime of the system to receive warranty and support on affecting components. For water quality requirement, see Lenovo Neptune Direct Water-Cooling Standards

The 38-drop water manifold and hoses can be ordered as listed in the following table.

Table 99. Water infrastructure ordering information
Part number Feature code Description
Manifold for 42U and 48U rack cabinet
4XF7A90061 C5YW ThinkSystem Neptune 38-Port Rack Manifold
Hoses to connect the manifold to an in-rack CDU
4XF7A90232 C5YX Connection Set, 38/45 Ports Manifold with in-rack CDU
4XF7A90233 C5YY Connection Set, 38-Port Manifold with in-rack CDU for 48U Rack
Hoses to connect the manifold to an in-row CDU
4XF7A90234 C5YZ Hose Set, 1 inch EPDM, 1.3m, for Rack Manifold with in-row CDU
4XF7A90235 C5Z0 Hose Set, 1 inch EPDM, 2.3m, for Rack Manifold with in-row CDU

Configuration notes:

  • This water connection solution described here cannot be used with the DW612S and N1380 enclosures as the water requirements are different.
  • The hoses for in-row CDUs that are listed in the table above have Eaton FD83 quick-disconnect couplings

RM100 In-Rack Coolant Distribution Unit

The RM100 In-Rack Coolant Distribution Unit (CDU) can provide 100kW cooling capacity within the rack cabinet. It is designed as a 4U high rack device installed at the bottom of the rack. The CDU is supported in the 42U and 48U Heavy Duty Rack Cabinets. 

For information about the 42U and 48U Heavy Duty Rack Cabinets, see the product guide:
https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1498-lenovo-heavy-duty-rack-cabinets

The following figure shows the RM100 CDU.

RM100 In-Rack Coolant Distribution Unit
Figure 29. RM100 In-Rack Coolant Distribution Unit

The CDU can be ordered using the CTO process in the configurators using machine type 7DBL. The following table lists the base CTO model and base feature code.

Table 100. RM100 ordering information
CTO model Base feature Description
7DBLCTOLWW BRL4 Lenovo Neptune DWC RM100 In-Rack CDU

For details and exact specification of the CDU, see the In-Rack CDU Operation & Maintenance Guide:
https://pubs.lenovo.com/hdc_rackcabinet/rm100_user_guide.pdf

Professional Services: The factory integration of the In-Rack CDU requires Lenovo Professional Services review and approval for warranty and associated extended services. Before ordering CDU and manifold, contact the Lenovo Professional Services team ( ).

Warranty upgrades and post-warranty support

The SR655 V3 has a 1-year or 3-year warranty based on the machine type of the system:

  • 7D9F - 1 year warranty
  • 7D9E - 3 year warranty

Our global network of regional support centers offers consistent, local-language support enabling you to vary response times and level of service* to match the criticality of your support needs:

  • Standard Next Business Day – Best choice for non-essential systems requiring simple maintenance.
  • Premier Next Business Day – Best choice for essential systems requiring technical expertise from senior-level Lenovo engineers.
  • Premier 24x7 4-Hour Response – Best choice for systems where maximum uptime is critical.

For more information, consult the brochure Lenovo Operational Support Services for Data Centers Services.

* Some service levels may not be available in all markets. Contact your sales representative for more information.

Services

Lenovo Data Center Services empower you at every stage of your IT lifecycle. From expert advisory and strategic planning to seamless deployment and ongoing support, we ensure your infrastructure is built for success. Our comprehensive services accelerate time to value, minimize downtime, and free your IT staff to focus on driving innovation and business growth.

Note: Some service options may not be available in all markets or regions. For more information, go to https://lenovolocator.com/. For information about Lenovo service upgrade offerings that are available in your region, contact your local Lenovo sales representative or business partner.

In this section:

  • Lenovo Advisory Services
  • Lenovo Plan & Design Services
  • Lenovo Deployment, Migration, and Configuration Services
  • Lenovo Support Services
  • Lenovo Managed Services
  • Lenovo Sustainability Services

Lenovo Advisory Services

Lenovo Advisory Services simplify the planning process, enabling customers to build future-proofed strategies in as little as six weeks. Consultants provide guidance on projects including VM migration, storage, backup and recovery, and cost management to accelerate time to value, improve cost efficiency, and build a flexibly scalable foundation.

  • Assessment Services

    An Assessment helps solve your IT challenges through an onsite, multi-day session with a Lenovo technology expert. We perform a tools-based assessment which provides a comprehensive and thorough review of a company's environment and technology systems. In addition to the technology based functional requirements, the consultant also discusses and records the non-functional business requirements, challenges, and constraints. Assessments help organizations like yours, no matter how large or small, get a better return on your IT investment and overcome challenges in the ever-changing technology landscape.

  • Design Services

    Professional Services consultants perform infrastructure design and implementation planning to support your strategy. The high-level architectures provided by the assessment service are turned into low level designs and wiring diagrams, which are reviewed and approved prior to implementation. The implementation plan will demonstrate an outcome-based proposal to provide business capabilities through infrastructure with a risk-mitigated project plan.

Lenovo Plan & Design Services

Unlock faster time to market with our tailored, strategic design workshops to align solution approaches with your business goals and technical requirements. Leverage our deep solution expertise and end-to-end delivery partnership to meet your goals efficiently and effectively.

Lenovo Deployment, Migration, and Configuration Services

Optimize your IT operations by shifting labor-intensive functions to Lenovo's skilled technicians for seamless on-site or remote deployment, configuration, and migration. Enjoy peace of mind, faster time to value, and comprehensive knowledge sharing with your IT staff, backed by our best-practice methodology.

  • Deployment Services for Storage and ThinkAgile

    A comprehensive range of remote and onsite options tailored specifically for your business needs to ensure your storage and ThinkAgile hardware are fully operational from the start.

  • Hardware Installation Services

    A full-range, comprehensive setup for your hardware, including unpacking, inspecting, and positioning components to ensure your equipment is operational and error-free for the most seamless and efficient installation experience, so you can quickly benefit from your investments.

  • DM/DG File Migration Services

    Take the burden of file migration from your IT’s shoulders. Our experts will align your requirements and business objectives to the migration plans while coordinating with your team to plan and safely execute the data migration to your storage platforms.

  • DM/DG/DE Health Check Services

    Our experts perform proactive checks of your Firmware and system health to ensure your machines are operating at peak and optimal efficiency to maximize up-time, avoid system failures, ensure the security of IT solutions and simplify maintenance.

  • Factory Integrated Services

    A suite of value-added offerings provided during the manufacturing phase of a server or storage system that reduces time to value. These services aim at improving your hardware deployment experience and enhance the quality of a standard configuration before it arrives at your facility.

Lenovo Support Services

In addition to response time options for hardware parts, repairs, and labor, Lenovo offers a wide array of additional support services to ensure your business is positioned for success and longevity. Our goal is to reduce your capital outlays, mitigate your IT risks, and accelerate your time to productivity.

Our commitment to ensuring the fastest, most seamless resolution times for mission-critical systems that require immediate attention to ensure minimal downtime and risk for your business. This service is only available for machines under the Premier 4-Hour Response SLA.

  • Premier Support for Data Centers

    Your direct line to the solution that promises the best, most comprehensive level of support to help you fully unlock the potential of your data center.

  • Premier Support Plus (PSP) for Servers 24x7 4-Hour Response

    Helping customers reduce unplanned downtime by moving from reactive support to proactive and preventative care

  • Premier Support Plus (PSP) for Storage 24x7 4-Hour Response

    Helping storage customers reduce unplanned downtime by moving from reactive support to proactive and preventative care

  • Committed Service Repair (CSR)

    Our commitment to ensuring the fastest, most seamless resolution times for mission-critical systems that require immediate attention to ensure minimal downtime and risk for your business. This service is only available for machines under the Premier 4-Hour Response SLA.

  • Multivendor Support Services (MVS)

    Your single point of accountability for resolution support across vast range of leading Server, Storage, and Networking OEMs, allowing you to manage all your supported infrastructure devices seamlessly from a single source.

  • Keep Your Drive (KYD)

    Protect sensitive data and maintain compliance with corporate retention and disposal policies to ensure your data is always under your control, regardless of the number of drives that are installed in your Lenovo server.

  • Technical Account Manager (TAM)

    Your single point of contact to expedite service requests, provide status updates, and furnish reports to track incidents over time, ensuring smooth operations and optimized performance as your business grows.

  • Enterprise Software Support (ESS)

    Gain comprehensive, single-source, and global support for a wide range of server operating systems and Microsoft server applications.

For more information, consult the brochure Lenovo Operational Support Services for Data Centers.

Lenovo Managed Services

Achieve peak efficiency, high security, and minimal disruption with Lenovo's always-on Managed Services. Our real-time monitoring, 24x7 incident response, and problem resolution ensure your infrastructure operates seamlessly. With quarterly health checks for ongoing optimization and innovation, Lenovo's remote active monitoring boosts end-user experience and productivity by keeping your data center's hardware performing at its best.

Lenovo Managed Services provides continuous 24x7 remote monitoring (plus 24x7 call center availability) and proactive management of your data center using state-of-the-art tools, systems, and practices by a team of highly skilled and experienced Lenovo services professionals.

Quarterly reviews check error logs, verify firmware & OS device driver levels, and software as needed. We’ll also maintain records of latest patches, critical updates, and firmware levels, to ensure you systems are providing business value through optimized performance.

Lenovo Sustainability Services

  • Asset Recovery Services

    Lenovo Asset Recovery Services (ARS) provides a secure, seamless solution for managing end-of-life IT assets, ensuring data is safely sanitized while contributing to a more circular IT lifecycle. By maximizing the reuse or responsible recycling of devices, ARS helps businesses meet sustainability goals while recovering potential value from their retired equipment. For more information, see the Asset Recovery Services offering page.

  • CO2 Offset Services

    Lenovo’s CO2 Offset Services offer a simple and transparent way for businesses to take tangible action on their IT footprint. By integrating CO2 offsets directly into device purchases, customers can easily support verified climate projects and track their contributions, making meaningful progress toward their sustainability goals without added complexity.

  • Lenovo Certified Refurbished

    Lenovo Certified Refurbished offers a cost-effective way to support IT circularity without compromising on quality and performance. Each device undergoes rigorous testing and certification, ensuring reliable performance and extending its lifecycle. With Lenovo’s trusted certification, you gain peace of mind while making a more sustainable IT choice.

Lenovo TruScale

Lenovo TruScale XaaS is your set of flexible IT services that makes everything easier. Streamline IT procurement, simplify infrastructure and device management, and pay only for what you use – so your business is free to grow and go anywhere.

Lenovo TruScale is  the unified solution that gives you simplified access to:

  • The industry’s broadest portfolio – from pocket to cloud – all delivered as a service
  • A single-contract framework for full visibility and accountability
  • The global scale to rapidly and securely build teams from anywhere
  • Flexible fixed and metered pay-as-you-go models with minimal upfront cost
  • The growth-driving combination of hardware, software, infrastructure, and solutions – all from one single provider with one point of accountability.

For information about Lenovo TruScale offerings that are available in your region, contact your local Lenovo sales representative or business partner.

Regulatory compliance

The SR655 V3 conforms to the following standards:

  • ANSI/UL 62368-1
  • IEC 62368-1 (CB Certificate and CB Test Report)
  • CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1
  • Mexico NOM-019
  • India BIS 13252 (Part 1)
  • Germany GS
  • TUV-GS (EN62368-1, and EK1-ITB2000)
  • Ukraine UkrCEPRO
  • Morocco CMIM Certification (CM)
  • Russia, Belorussia and Kazakhstan, TP EAC 037/2016 (for RoHS)
  • Russia, Belorussia and Kazakhstan, EAC: TP TC 004/2011 (for Safety); TP TC 020/2011 (for EMC)
  • CE, UKCA Mark (EN55032 Class A, EN62368-1, EN55024, EN55035, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, (EU) 2019/424, and EN IEC 63000 (RoHS))
  • FCC - Verified to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, Class A
  • Canada ICES-003, issue 7, Class A
  • CISPR 32, Class A, CISPR 35
  • Korea KN32, Class A, KN35
  • Japan VCCI, Class A
  • Taiwan BSMI CNS15936, Class A; CNS15598-1; Section 5 of CNS15663
  • Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS CISPR 32, Class A; AS/NZS 62368.1
  • UL Green Guard, UL2819
  • Energy Star 4.0
  • EPEAT (NSF/ ANSI 426) Bronze
  • Japanese Energy-Saving Act
  • EU2019/424 Energy Related Product (ErP Lot9)
  • China CCC certificate, GB17625.1; GB4943.1; GB/T9254
  • China CECP certificate, CQC3135
  • China CELP certificate, HJ 2507-2011

External drive enclosures

The server supports attachment to external drive enclosures using a RAID controller with external ports or a SAS host bus adapter. Adapters supported by the server are listed in the SAS adapters for external storage section.

Note: Information provided in this section is for ordering reference purposes only. For the operating system and adapter support details, refer to the interoperability matrix for a particular storage enclosure that can be found on the Lenovo Data Center Support web site:
http://datacentersupport.lenovo.com

Table 101. External drive enclosures
Model Description
4587HC1 Lenovo Storage D1212 Disk Expansion Enclosure (2U enclosure with 12x LFF drive bays)
4587HC2 Lenovo Storage D1224 Disk Expansion Enclosure (2U enclosure with 24x SFF drive bays)
6413HC1 Lenovo Storage D3284 High Density Expansion Enclosure (5U enclosure with 84x LFF drive bays)
7DAHCTO1WW Lenovo ThinkSystem D4390 Direct Attached Storage (4U enclosure with 90x LFF drive bays)

For details about supported drives, adapters, and cables, see the following Lenovo Press Product Guides:

  • Lenovo Storage D1212 and D1224
    http://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp0512
  • Lenovo Storage D3284
    http://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp0513
  • Lenovo ThinkSystem D4390
    https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/lp1681

External storage systems

Lenovo offers the ThinkSystem DE Series, ThinkSystem DG Series, ThinkSystem DM Series and ThinkSystem DS Series external storage systems for high-performance storage. See the DE Series, DG Series and DM Series product guides for specific controller models, expansion enclosures and configuration options:

  • ThinkSystem DE Series Storage
    https://lenovopress.com/storage/thinksystem/de-series#rt=product-guide
  • ThinkSystem DS Series Storage
    https://lenovopress.lenovo.com/storage/thinksystem/ds-series
  • ThinkSystem DM Series Storage
    https://lenovopress.com/storage/thinksystem/dm-series#rt=product-guide
  • ThinkSystem DG Series Storage
    https://lenovopress.com/storage/thinksystem/dg-series#rt=product-guide

External backup units

The following table lists the external backup options that are offered by Lenovo.

Table 102. External backup options
Part number Description
External RDX USB drives
4T27A10725 ThinkSystem RDX External USB 3.0 Dock
External SAS tape backup drives
6160S6E IBM TS2260 Tape Drive Model H6S
6160S7E IBM TS2270 Tape Drive Model H7S
6160S8E IBM TS2280 Tape Drive Model H8S
6160S9E IBM TS2290 Tape Drive Model H9S
External SAS tape backup autoloaders
6171S6R IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader w/LTO6 HH SAS
6171S7R IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader w/LTO7 HH SAS
6171S8R IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader w/LTO8 HH SAS
6171S9R IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader w/LTO9 HH SAS
External tape backup libraries
6741A1F IBM TS4300 3U Tape Library Base Unit
6741B1F IBM TS4300 3U Tape Library Base Unit - Max 48U
6741A3F TS4300 Tape Library Expansion Unit
6741B3F IBM TS4300 3U Tape Library Expansion Unit - Max 48U
SAS backup drives for TS4300 Tape Library
01KP934 LTO 6 HH SAS Drive
01KP937 LTO 7 HH SAS Drive
01KP953 LTO 8 HH SAS Drive
02JH836 LTO 9 HH SAS Drive
Full High 8 Gb Fibre Channel for TS4300
01KP938 LTO 7 FH Fibre Channel Drive
01KP954 LTO 8 FH Fibre Channel Drive
02JH837 LTO 9 FH Fibre Channel Drive
Half High 8 Gb Fibre Channel for TS4300
01KP936 LTO 7 HH Fibre Channel Drive
01KP952 LTO 8 HH Fibre Channel Drive
02JH835 LTO 9 HH Fibre Channel Drive
Half High 6 Gb SAS for TS4300
01KP937 LTO 7 HH SAS Drive
01KP953 LTO 8 HH SAS Drive
02JH836 LTO 9 HH SAS Drive

For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the Backup units category:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/backup

Fibre Channel SAN switches

Lenovo offers the ThinkSystem DB Series of Fibre Channel SAN switches for high-performance storage expansion. See the DB Series product guides for models and configuration options:

  • ThinkSystem DB Series SAN Switches:
    https://lenovopress.com/storage/switches#rt=product-guide

Uninterruptible power supply units

The following table lists the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) units that are offered by Lenovo.

Table 103. Uninterruptible power supply units
Part number Description
Rack-mounted or tower UPS units - 100-125VAC
7DD5A001WW RT1.5kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (100-125VAC)
55941AX RT1.5kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS (100-125VAC)
55942AX RT2.2kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS (100-125VAC)
7DD5A003WW RT3kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (100-125VAC)
55943AX RT3kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS (100-125VAC)
Rack-mounted or tower UPS units - 200-240VAC
7DD5A002WW RT1.5kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (200-240VAC)
55941KX RT1.5kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
55942KX RT2.2kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
7DD5A005WW RT3kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (200-240VAC)
55943KX RT3kVA 2U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
7DD5A007WW RT5kVA 3U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (200-240VAC)
55945KX RT5kVA 3U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
7DD5A008WW RT6kVA 3U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (200-240VAC)
55946KX RT6kVA 3U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
55948KX RT8kVA 6U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
7DD5A00AWW RT11kVA 6U Rack or Tower UPS-G2 (200-240VAC)
55949KX RT11kVA 6U Rack or Tower UPS (200-240VAC)
55943KT† ThinkSystem RT3kVA 2U Standard UPS (200-230VAC) (2x C13 10A, 2x GB 10A, 1x C19 16A outlets)
55943LT† ThinkSystem RT3kVA 2U Long Backup UPS (200-230VAC) (2x C13 10A, 2x GB 10A, 1x C19 16A outlets)
55946KT† ThinkSystem RT6kVA 5U UPS (200-230VAC) (2x C13 10A outlets, 1x Terminal Block output)
5594XKT† ThinkSystem RT10kVA 5U UPS (200-230VAC) (2x C13 10A outlets, 1x Terminal Block output)
Rack-mounted or tower UPS units - 380-415VAC
55948PX RT8kVA 6U 3:1 Phase Rack or Tower UPS (380-415VAC)
55949PX RT11kVA 6U 3:1 Phase Rack or Tower UPS (380-415VAC)

† Only available in China and the Asia Pacific market.

For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the UPS category:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/ups

Power distribution units

The following table lists the power distribution units (PDUs) that are offered by Lenovo.

Table 104. Power distribution units
Part
number		 Feature
code		 Description
ANZ
ASEAN
Brazil
EET
MEA
RUCIS
WE
HTK
INDIA
JAPAN
LA
NA
PRC
0U Basic PDUs
4PU7A93176C0DA0U 36 C13 and 6 C19 Basic 32A 1 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
4PU7A93177C0D90U 24 C13/C15 and 24 C13/C15/C19 Basic 32A 3 Phase WYE PDU v2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
00YJ776ATZY0U 36 C13/6 C19 24A 1 Phase PDU N Y Y N N N N N N Y Y Y N
00YJ779ATZX0U 21 C13/12 C19 48A 3 Phase PDU N N Y N N N Y N N Y Y Y N
00YJ777ATZZ0U 36 C13/6 C19 32A 1 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y
00YJ778AU000U 21 C13/12 C19 32A 3 Phase PDU Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y
0U Switched and Monitored PDUs
4PU7B08148CD150U 3 C13 and 18 C19 Monitored 48A 3 Phase WYE PDU N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
4PU7B08149CD160U 3 C13 and 18 C19 Monitored 63A 3 Phase WYE PDU N N N Y N N Y Y N N N N N
4PU7A93181C0D50U 21 C13/C15 and 21 C13/C15/C19 Switched and Monitored 60A 3 Phase Delta PDU v2 N Y N N Y N N Y N Y N Y N
4PU7A93178C0D80U 20 C13 and 4 C19 Switched and Monitored 32A 1 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
4PU7A93182C0CS0U 18 C13/C15 and 18 C13/C15/C19 Switched and Monitored 63A 3 Phase WYE PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
4PU7A93180C0D60U 18 C13/C15 and 18 C13/C15/C19 Switched and Monitored 32A 3 Phase WYE PDU v2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
4PU7A93179C0D70U 16 C13/C15 and 16 C13/C15/C19 Switched and Monitored 30A 1 Phase PDU v2 N Y N N N N N Y N Y Y Y N
00YJ783AU040U 12 C13/12 C19 Switched and Monitored 48A 3 Phase PDU N N Y N N N Y N N Y Y Y N
00YJ781AU030U 20 C13/4 C19 Switched and Monitored 24A 1 Phase PDU N N Y N Y N Y N N Y Y Y N
00YJ782AU020U 18 C13/6 C19 Switched and Monitored 32A 3 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y
00YJ780AU010U 20 C13/4 C19 Switched and Monitored 32A 1 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y
1U Basic PDUs
4PU7B12339CE6L1U Basic 16A 1 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
1U Switched and Monitored PDUs
4PU7A90808C0D41U 18 C19/C13 Switched and monitored 48A 3P WYE PDU V2 ETL N N N N N N N Y N Y Y Y N
4PU7A81117BNDV1U 18 C19/C13 switched and monitored 48A 3P WYE PDU - ETL N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
4PU7A90809C0DE1U 18 C19/C13 Switched and monitored 48A 3P WYE PDU V2 CE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y
4PU7A81118BNDW1U 18 C19/C13 switched and monitored 48A 3P WYE PDU – CE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y
4PU7A90810C0DD1U 18 C19/C13 Switched and monitored 80A 3P Delta PDU V2 N N N N N N N Y N Y Y Y N
4PU7A77467BLC41U 18 C19/C13 Switched and Monitored 80A 3P Delta PDU N N N N N N N N N Y N Y N
4PU7A90811C0DC1U 12 C19/C13 Switched and monitored 32A 3P WYE PDU V2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
4PU7A77468BLC51U 12 C19/C13 switched and monitored 32A 3P WYE PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
4PU7A90812C0DB1U 12 C19/C13 Switched and monitored 60A 3P Delta PDU V2 N N Y N N N N Y N Y Y Y N
4PU7A77469BLC61U 12 C19/C13 switched and monitored 60A 3P Delta PDU N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
46M400258961U 9 C19/3 C13 Switched and Monitored DPI PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
46M400458941U 12 C13 Switched and Monitored DPI PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
46M400358971U 9 C19/3 C13 Switched and Monitored 60A 3 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
46M400558951U 12 C13 Switched and Monitored 60A 3 Phase PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
1U C13 Enterprise PDUs (12x IEC 320 C13 outlets)
39M28166030DPI C13 PDU+ Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
39Y89416010Enterprise C13 PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
1U C19 Enterprise PDUs (6x IEC 320 C19 outlets)
39Y89486060Enterprise C19 PDU Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
39Y89236061Enterprise C19 3 phase PDU (60a) N N Y N N N Y N N N Y Y N
1U Front-end PDUs (3x IEC 320 C19 outlets)
39Y89386002DPI 30amp/125V Front-end PDU with NEMA L5-30P Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
39Y89396003DPI 30amp/250V Front-end PDU with NEMA L6-30P Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
39Y89346005DPI 32amp/250V Front-end PDU with IEC 309 2P+Gnd Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
39Y89406004DPI 60amp/250V Front-end PDU with IEC 309 2P+Gnd connector Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y N
39Y89356006DPI 63amp/250V Front-end PDU with IEC 309 2P+Gnd connector Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
1U NEMA PDUs (6x NEMA 5-15R outlets)
39Y89055900DPI 100-127v PDU with Fixed Nema L5-15P line cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Line cords for 1U PDUs that ship without a line cord
40K961165044.3m, 32A/380-415V, EPDU/IEC 309 3P+N+G 3ph wye (non-US) Line Cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
40K961265024.3m, 32A/230V, EPDU to IEC 309 P+N+G (non-US) Line Cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
40K961365034.3m, 63A/230V, EPDU to IEC 309 P+N+G (non-US) Line Cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
40K961465004.3m, 30A/208V, EPDU to NEMA L6-30P (US) Line Cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
40K961565014.3m, 60A/208V, EPDU to IEC 309 2P+G (US) Line Cord N N Y N N N Y N N Y Y Y N
40K961765054.3m, 32A/230V, Souriau UTG to AS/NZS 3112 (Aus/NZ) Line Cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
40K961865064.3m, 32A/250V, Souriau UTG Female to KSC 8305 (S. Korea) Line Cord Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

For more information, see the Lenovo Press documents in the PDU category:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/pdu

Rack cabinets

The following table lists the supported rack cabinets.

Table 105. Rack cabinets
Model Description
7D2NCTO1WW 12U 1200mm Deep Micro Datacenter Rack
7D2PCTO1WW 18U 1200mm Deep Micro Datacenter Rack
7D6DA007WW ThinkSystem 42U Onyx Primary Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet (1200mm)
7D6DA008WW ThinkSystem 42U Pearl Primary Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet (1200mm)
7D6EA009WW ThinkSystem 48U Onyx Primary Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet (1200mm)
7D6EA00AWW ThinkSystem 48U Pearl Primary Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet (1200mm)
1410O42 Lenovo EveryScale 42U Onyx Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet
1410P42 Lenovo EveryScale 42U Pearl Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet
1410O48 Lenovo EveryScale 48U Onyx Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet
1410P48 Lenovo EveryScale 48U Pearl Heavy Duty Rack Cabinet
93072RX 25U Standard Rack (1000mm)
93072PX 25U Static S2 Standard Rack (1000mm)
93074RX 42U Standard Rack (1000mm)
93604PX 42U 1200mm Deep Dynamic Rack
93614PX 42U 1200mm Deep Static Rack
93634PX 42U 1100mm Dynamic Rack
93634EX 42U 1100mm Dynamic Expansion Rack
93084PX 42U Enterprise Rack
93084EX 42U Enterprise Expansion Rack

For specifications about these racks, see the Lenovo Rack Cabinet Reference, available from:
https://lenovopress.com/lp1287-lenovo-rack-cabinet-reference

For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the Rack cabinets category:
https://lenovopress.com/servers/options/racks

KVM console options

The following table lists the supported KVM consoles.

Table 106. KVM console
Part number Description
Consoles
4XF7A84188 ThinkSystem 18.5" LCD console (with US English keyboard)
4XF7A73009 ThinkSystem 18.5" LCD console (with US English keyboard)
17238BX 1U 18.5" Standard Console (without keyboard - see the next table)

The following table lists the keyboards supported with the 1U 18.5" Standard Console (now withdrawn).

Note: These keyboards are not supported with the ThinkSystem 18.5" LCD Console.

Table 107. Keyboards for 1U 18.5" Standard Console
Part number Description
7ZB7A05469 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int.Pointing Device USB - Arabic 253 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05468 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Belg/UK 120 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05206 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Czech 489 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05207 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Danish 159 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05208 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Dutch 143 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05210 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Fr/Canada 445 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05209 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - French 189 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05211 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - German 129 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05212 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Greek 219 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05213 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Hebrew 212 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05214 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Hungarian 208 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05215 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Italian 141 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05216 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Japanese 194 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05217 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Korean 413 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05218 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - LA Span 171 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05219 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Norwegian 155 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05220 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Polish 214 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05221 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Portugese 163 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05222 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Russian 441 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05223 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Slovak 245 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05231 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Slovenian 234 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05224 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Spanish 172 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05225 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Swed/Finn 153 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05226 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Swiss F/G 150 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05227 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Thai 191 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05467 ThinkSystem Keyboard with Int. Pointing Device USB - Trad Chinese/US 467 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05228 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - Turkish 179 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05229 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - UK Eng 166 RoHS v2
7ZB7A05470 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - US Eng 103P RoHS v2
7ZB7A05230 ThinkSystem Keyboard w/ Int. Pointing Device USB - US Euro 103P RoHS v2

The following table lists the available KVM switches and the options that are supported with them.

Table 108. KVM switches and options
Part number Description
KVM Console switches
1754D1T ThinkSystem Digital 2x1x16 KVM Switch (DVI video output port)
1754A1T ThinkSystem Analog 1x8 KVM Switch (DVI video output port)
1754D2X Global 4x2x32 Console Manager (GCM32)
1754D1X Global 2x2x16 Console Manager (GCM16)
1754A2X Local 2x16 Console Manager (LCM16)
1754A1X Local 1x8 Console Manager (LCM8)
Cables for ThinkSystem Digital and Analog KVM Console switches
4X97A11108 ThinkSystem VGA to DVI Conversion Cable
4X97A11109 ThinkSystem Single-USB Conversion Cable for Digital KVM
4X97A11107 ThinkSystem Dual-USB Conversion Cable for Digital KVM
4X97A11106 ThinkSystem USB Conversion Cable for Analog KVM
Cables for GCM and LCM Console switches
43V6147 Single Cable USB Conversion Option (UCO)
39M2895 USB Conversion Option Pack
46M5383 Virtual Media Conversion Option Gen2 (VCO2)
46M5382 Serial Conversion Option (SCO)

For more information, see the list of Product Guides in the KVM Switches and Consoles category:
http://lenovopress.com/servers/options/kvm

Lenovo Financial Services

Why wait to obtain the technology you need now? No payments for 90 days and predictable, low monthly payments make it easy to budget for your Lenovo solution.

  • Flexible

    Our in-depth knowledge of the products, services and various market segments allows us to offer greater flexibility in structures, documentation and end of lease options.

  • 100% Solution Financing

    Financing your entire solution including hardware, software, and services, ensures more predictability in your project planning with fixed, manageable payments and low monthly payments.

  • Device as a Service (DaaS)

    Leverage latest technology to advance your business. Customized solutions aligned to your needs. Flexibility to add equipment to support growth. Protect your technology with Lenovo's Premier Support service.

  • 24/7 Asset management

    Manage your financed solutions with electronic access to your lease documents, payment histories, invoices and asset information.

  • Fair Market Value (FMV) and $1 Purchase Option Leases

    Maximize your purchasing power with our lowest cost option. An FMV lease offers lower monthly payments than loans or lease-to-own financing. Think of an FMV lease as a rental. You have the flexibility at the end of the lease term to return the equipment, continue leasing it, or purchase it for the fair market value. In a $1 Out Purchase Option lease, you own the equipment. It is a good option when you are confident you will use the equipment for an extended period beyond the finance term. Both lease types have merits depending on your needs. We can help you determine which option will best meet your technological and budgetary goals.

Ask your Lenovo Financial Services representative about this promotion and how to submit a credit application. For the majority of credit applicants, we have enough information to deliver an instant decision and send a notification within minutes.

Seller training courses

The following sales training courses are offered for employees and partners (login required). Courses are listed in date order.

  1. Partner Technical Webinar: Intel Xeon 6 & Ethernet NIC update
    2026-07-14 | 60 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar: Intel Xeon 6 & Ethernet NIC update

    In this 60 minute replay, Madhu Bramharouthu and Raj Pathak from Intel presented the latest information on Xeon 6 processors and Intel Ethernet adapters.

    Published: 2026-07-14
    Length: 60 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: JUL1026
  2. Lenovo Data Center Sales Certification Exam Study Guide
    2026-07-13 | 10 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Lenovo Data Center Sales Certification Exam Study Guide

    This guide includes information to help candidates prepare and register for the Data Center Sales practice and certification exams.

    Published: 2026-07-13
    Length: 10 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: LENU-122C-SG
  3. Lenovo Data Center Technical Certification Exam Study Guide
    2026-07-13 | 10 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Lenovo Data Center Technical Certification Exam Study Guide

    This guide includes information to help candidates prepare and register for the Data Center Technical practice and certification exams.

    Published: 2026-07-13
    Length: 10 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: LENU-322C-SG
  4. Partner Technical Webinar - TCE, DCSC, Enterprise Solutions, & LBPe ISG Financing
    2026-06-09 | 60 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar - TCE, DCSC, Enterprise Solutions, & LBPe ISG Financing

    In this 60‑minute replay, we received updates from George Scarbrough on TCE, Amit Chandok on the DCSC, Tracie Heath Garcia on LBPe ISG Financing, and Alejandro Perez Quintero on Enterprise IT Solutions.

    Published: 2026-06-09
    Length: 60 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: JUN0526
  5. Partner Technical Webinar - mAInstream Volume Enterprise AI
    2026-05-11 | 45 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar - mAInstream Volume Enterprise AI

    In this 45 minute replay, Alex “Doc” Docherty, Lenovo AI Technology for NA Channel, discussed Mainstream and volume Servers for enterprise AI solutions. He talked about the need, the supply and some new programs for the channel.

    Published: 2026-05-11
    Length: 45 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: MAY0826
  6. Partner Technical Webinar - AI Servers
    2026-04-20 | 30 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar - AI Servers

    In this 30 minute replay, Mark Bica, Lenovo NA ISG Server Product Manager, presented the Lenovo AI Servers. Mark also gave an update on M.2 changes the latest with TCE (Top Choice Express).

    Published: 2026-04-20
    Length: 30 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: APR1726
  7. Partner Technical Webinar - Server Review Racks, Towers & Edge
    2026-03-16 | 60 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar - Server Review Racks, Towers & Edge

    In this 60-minute replay, the Channel Solution Architect team provides an overview of the Lenovo ISG server portfolio. Eugene Grandberry, Ian Sloan, and Chris Laffey cover Towers, Racks, Edge, and TCE.

    Published: 2026-03-16
    Length: 60 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: MAR1326
  8. ISG Smarter Tools, Faster Deals and Better Outcomes
    2026-02-27 | 40 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    ISG Smarter Tools, Faster Deals and Better Outcomes

    In this 40-minute video, we review several tools and programs from Lenovo ISG to help our Partners’ Data Center selling efforts: Smarter Tools / Faster Deals / Better Outcomes. We cover Top Choice Express, our premier program for supply optimized solutions. We next demonstrated DCSC, the Data Center Solution Configurator, Compete Tool for comparisons with our competition, and XClarity One, the next evolution of our XClarity Systems Management tool.

    Tags: DataCenter Products

    Published: 2026-02-27
    Length: 40 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: FEB2426
  9. ThinkSystem Rackmount and Tower Servers powered by AMD
    2026-02-23 | 25 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    ThinkSystem Rackmount and Tower Servers powered by AMD

    This course presents the key products and features of the ThinkSystem Rackmount and Tower server family powered by AMD processors. It describes customer benefits and will help you recognize when a specific product should be selected.

    By the end of this course, you should be able to:
    - Identify products and features within the family
    - Describe customer benefits offered by this family
    - Recognize when a specific product should be selected

    Last updated: 2/24/2026

    Tags: Server, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2026-02-23
    Length: 25 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW1216r11
  10. OneIQ Overview and Demo
    2026-02-10 | 35 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    OneIQ Overview and Demo

    In this 35-minute video, Peter Grant, Head of Customer Experience for OneIQ, presents and overview and demo of OneIQ for Lenovo Partners.

    Tags: Sales Tools

    Published: 2026-02-10
    Length: 35 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: ONEIQ101
  11. Family Portfolio: ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Servers Powered by Intel
    2026-02-04 | 25 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Family Portfolio: ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Servers Powered by Intel

    This course is designed to give Lenovo sales and partner representatives a foundation of the ThinkSystem Intel Rackmount and Tower server family.
    After completing this course, you will be able to:
    - Identify products within this ThinkSystem server family
    - Describe features of this family
    - Recognize when a specific product should be selected

    Tags: Server, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2026-02-04
    Length: 25 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW1204r15
  12. ThinkSystem Rack & Tower Server Primer - Module 2
    2025-12-17 | 45 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    ThinkSystem Rack & Tower Server Primer - Module 2

    This course builds on the foundational concepts from the prework modules, helping Client Managers deepen their understanding of ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Servers and apply that knowledge to confidently initiate value-driven customer conversations. Please Note: The videos in this course are taken from the Module 2 live session led by Tikiri Wandregala.

    By the end of this course, you will be able to:

    - Demonstrate the ability to initiate a data center discussion with a customer.
    - Analyze and evaluate potential data center opportunities.
    - Apply criteria to effectively qualify an opportunity.
    - Locate and differentiate key resources and contacts.

    Tags: DataCenter Products, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2025-12-17
    Length: 45 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DSRTB101
  13. Partner Technical Webinar - Mainstream CPUs
    2025-09-29 | 40 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar - Mainstream CPUs

    In this 40-minute replay, Brad Violand, Lenovo ISG Category team, reviewed the strategy to optimize the CPU portfolio and ensuing changes to DCSC planned for October 1, 2025.

    Tags: Server

    Published: 2025-09-29
    Length: 40 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SEP2625
  14. Partner Technical Webinar - ISG Portfolio - Wayne's World
    2025-09-25 | 60 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Partner Technical Webinar - ISG Portfolio - Wayne's World

    In this 60-minute replay, Wayne Pecht, Lenovo Channel SA, shared his extensive experience and unique approach to the ISG Portfolio "Wayne's World for Lenovo ISG"!

    Tags: Channel, Technical Sales

    Published: 2025-09-25
    Length: 60 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SEP1925
  15. Think AI Weekly: ISG & SSG Better Together: Uniting AI Solutions & Services for Smarter Outcomes
    2025-08-01 | 55 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    Think AI Weekly: ISG & SSG Better Together: Uniting AI Solutions & Services for Smarter Outcomes

    View this session to hear from our speakers Allen Holmes, AI Technologist, ISG and Balaji Subramaniam, AI Regional Leader-Americas, SSG.

    Topics include:

    • An overview of ISG & SSG AI CoE Offerings with Customer Case Studies
    • The Enterprise AI Deal Engagement Flow with ISG and SSG
    • How sellers can leverage this partnership to differentiate with Enterprise clients.
    • NEW COURSE: From Inception to Execution: Evolution of an AI Deal

    Tags: Artificial Intelligence (AI), Sales, Services, Technology Solutions, TruScale Infrastructure as a Service

    Published: 2025-08-01
    Length: 55 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DTAIW145
  16. VTT-HPC: Explaining HPC Benchmarking: Processes, Standards and Best Practices
    2025-07-30 | 87 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    VTT-HPC: Explaining HPC Benchmarking: Processes, Standards and Best Practices

    Please join us as Eric Michel, HPC & AI Performance Team Coordinator and Kevin Dean, Sr Manager, HPC Performance, Projection & Operations speak with us about HPC Benchmarking.

    Topics will include:

    • Why sellers need to request benchmarks
    • How to request benchmarks
    • How the team performs a benchmark
    • The performance database
    • Demonstration of the tool

    Tags: Advanced Data Center, High Performance Computing (HPC), Technical Sales

    Published: 2025-07-30
    Length: 87 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DVHPC224
  17. Family Portfolio: Server Component Options
    2025-07-21 | 20 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Family Portfolio: Server Component Options

    This course covers opportunities that are available to upsell server components. By upselling the correct components, you can increase the size and revenue of the original sale.
    After completing this course, you should be able to:
    • Identify the opportunities for an upsell
    • Recognize when specific products should be discussed
    • Emphasize how a product benefits the customer
    • Identify keywords that indicate upsell opportunities

    Tags: Server, Storage

    Published: 2025-07-21
    Length: 20 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW1109r2
  18. ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Introduction for ISO Client Managers
    2025-06-16 | 20 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Introduction for ISO Client Managers

    In this course, you will learn about Lenovo’s Data Center Portfolio, its ThinkSystem Family and the key features of the Rack and Tower servers. It will equip you with foundational knowledge which you can then expand upon by participating in the facilitated session of the curriculum.

    Tags: Server, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2025-06-16
    Length: 20 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DSRTO101r2_JP
  19. Lenovo Data Center Product Portfolio
    2025-06-11 | 20 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Lenovo Data Center Product Portfolio

    This course introduces the Lenovo data center portfolio, and covers servers, storage, storage networking, and software-defined infrastructure products. After completing this course about Lenovo data center products, you will be able to identify product types within each data center family, describe Lenovo innovations that this product family or category uses, and recognize when a specific product should be selected.

    Course objectives:
    1.Identify product types within each data center family
    2.Describe the features of the product family or category
    3.Recognize when a specific product should be selected

    Tags: Advanced DataCenter, DataCenter Products, Server, ThinkAgile, ThinkEdge, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2025-06-11
    Length: 20 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW1110r8
  20. VTT HPC: AI and the Impact on the Environment
    2025-06-11 | 58 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    VTT HPC: AI and the Impact on the Environment

    Please join us as Matthew Ziegler, Director of Lenovo Neptune and Sustainability speaks with us about AI and the Impact on the Environment.

    Topics will include:

    - Why is ESG essential for your customer?
    - How to find and read an eco declaration
    - What is a product carbon footprint?
    - Demo of the Lenovo Capacity Planner

    Tags: Advanced DataCenter, Artificial Intelligence (AI), Environmental Social Governance (ESG), High-Performance Computing (HPC), Server

    Published: 2025-06-11
    Length: 58 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DVHPC223
  21. Family Portfolio: Storage Controller Options
    2025-03-03 | 25 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Family Portfolio: Storage Controller Options

    This course covers the storage controller options available for use in Lenovo servers. The classes of storage controller are discussed, along with a discussion of where they are used, and which to choose.

    After completing this course, you will be able to:
    • Describe the classes of storage controllers
    • Discuss where each controller class is used
    • Describe the available options in each controller class

    Tags: Sales, Storage

    Published: 2025-03-03
    Length: 25 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW1111r2
  22. ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Introduction for ISO Client Managers
    2024-12-10 | 20 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    ThinkSystem Rack and Tower Introduction for ISO Client Managers

    In this course, you will learn about Lenovo’s Data Center Portfolio, its ThinkSystem Family and the key features of the Rack and Tower servers. It will equip you with foundational knowledge which you can then expand upon by participating in the facilitated session of the curriculum.

    Course Objectives:
    • By the end of this course, you should be able to:
    • Identify Lenovo’s main data center brands.
    • Describe the key components of the ThinkSystem Family servers.
    • Differentiate between the Rack and Tower servers of the ThinkSystem Family.
    • Understand the value Rack and Tower servers can provide to customers.

    Tags: Server, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2024-12-10
    Length: 20 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DSRTO101r2
  23. Q3 Solutions Launch AMD EPYC Gen5 Quick Hit
    2024-10-09 | 6 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Q3 Solutions Launch AMD EPYC Gen5 Quick Hit

    Lenovo announces upgrades to a wide range of ThinkSystem V3 servers powered by AMD processors. Support for the AMD EPYC 9005 Series processors and faster DDR5 memory will enhance the performance and power efficiency of these servers as well as the ThinkAgile systems based on them

    Tags: Artificial Intelligence (AI), Server, ThinkAgile, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2024-10-09
    Length: 6 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW1216r9a
  24. SAP Webinar for Lenovo Sellers: Lenovo Portfolio Update for SAP Landscapes
    2024-06-04 | 60 minutes | Employees Only
    Details
    SAP Webinar for Lenovo Sellers: Lenovo Portfolio Update for SAP Landscapes

    Join Mark Kelly, Advisory IT Architect with the Lenovo Global SAP Center of Competence as he discusses:
    •Challenges in the SAP environment
    •Lenovo On-premise Solutions for SAP
    •Lenovo support resources for SAP solutions

    Tags: SAP, ThinkAgile, ThinkEdge, ThinkSystem

    Published: 2024-06-04
    Length: 60 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo

    Course code: DSAPF101
  25. Introduction to DDR5 Memory
    2022-08-23 | 10 minutes | Employees and Partners
    Details
    Introduction to DDR5 Memory

    This course introduces DDR5 memory, describes new features of this memory generation, and discusses the advantages to customers of this new memory generation.

    Tags: Server, Technology solutions

    Published: 2022-08-23
    Length: 10 minutes

    Start the training:
    Employee link: Grow@Lenovo
    Partner link: Lenovo 360 Learning Center

    Course code: SXXW2502

1-10 of 25 courses.

Related product families

Product families related to this document are the following:

  • 1-Socket Rack Servers
  • ThinkSystem SR655 V3 Server

Trademarks

Lenovo and the Lenovo logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. A current list of Lenovo trademarks is available on the Web at https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/legal/copytrade/.

The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:
Lenovo®
AnyBay®
Lenovo TruScale®
Neptune®
ServerProven®
System x®
ThinkAgile®
ThinkEdge®
ThinkShield®
ThinkSystem®
TruScale®
XClarity®

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

AMD®, 3D V-Cache®, AMD EPYC®, AMD Instinct®, and EPYC® are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

Intel®, the Intel logo, Intel Core®, and Xeon® are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries.

Linux® is the trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft®, ActiveX®, PowerPoint®, PowerShell®, SharePoint®, Windows 11™, Windows Server®, and Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.

TPC® is a trademark of Transaction Processing Performance Council.

SPEC®, SPEC ACCEL®, SPEC CPU®, SPEC MPI®, SPEC OMP®, SPEChpc™, SPECjbb®, SPECpower®, SPECrate®, and SPECspeed® are trademarks of the Standard Performance Evaluation Corporation (SPEC).

IBM® and IBM Security® are trademarks of IBM in the United States, other countries, or both.

NVIDIA®, NVIDIA HGX®, and NVIDIA RTX® are trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.